Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutResolution - 4832 - Contract - Bruce Thornton Air Conditioning Inc - A/C, Lubbock Municipal Coliseum - 05/11/1995Resolution No. 4832 May 11, 1995 Item 418 RESOLUTION BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and directe_ execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock a Contract and all related documents by and between the City of Lubbock and Bruce Thornton Air Conditioning, Inc., of Lubbock to furnish and install all materials as bid for the air conditioning for the Lubbock Municipal Coliseum, which contract is attached hereto, which shall be spread upon the minutes of the Council and as spread upon the minutes of this Council shall constitute and be a part of this Resolution as if fully copied herein in detail. Passed by the City Council this ATTEST: etty M.'Johnsoit City Secretary APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: LL Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager APPROVED AS TO FORM:,,, D&fild G. Vandiver, First Assistant City Attorney dp:ccdocslao-lmc.Res May 2, 1995 CITY OF LUBBOCK SPECIFICATIONS FOR AIR CONDITIONING FOR MUNICIPAL COLISEUM r",t 6� 6y BID # 13193 CITY OF LUBBOCK Lubbock, Texas I MAILED TO VENDOR: OLD CLOSE DATE: NEW CLOSE DATE: Office of Purchasing February 23, 1995 March 15, 1995 @ 2:00 P.M. March 22, 1995 Qa 2:00 P.M. Bid #13193- AIR CONDITIONING FOR MUNICIPAL COLISEUM ' ADDENDUM # 1 Please modify or amend Contract Documents as follows 1. The closing date for this project has been changed from the OLD close date of March 15, 1995 ria 2.00 P.M. to the NEW CLOSE DATE OF MARCH 22 1995 A 2:00 P.M. PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY WITH YOUR BID f City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 78457 BOB -767-2167 MAILED TO VENDOR: OLD CLOSE DATE: NEW CLOSE DATE: Office of Purchasing February 23, 1995 March 15, 1995 @ 2:00 P.M. March 22, 1995 Qa 2:00 P.M. Bid #13193- AIR CONDITIONING FOR MUNICIPAL COLISEUM ' ADDENDUM # 1 Please modify or amend Contract Documents as follows 1. The closing date for this project has been changed from the OLD close date of March 15, 1995 ria 2.00 P.M. to the NEW CLOSE DATE OF MARCH 22 1995 A 2:00 P.M. PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY WITH YOUR BID MAILED TO VENDOR: OLD CLOSE DATE: NEW CLOSE DATE: Office of Purchasing March 14,1995 @ 4:00 P.M. March 23, 1995 2:00 P.M. April 20, 1995 @ 2:00 P.M. BID #13193 - AIR CONDITIONING FOR LUBBOCK MUNICIPAL COLISEUM ADDENDUM # 1 Please modify or amend Contract Documents as follows: 1. The closing date for this project has been changed from the old closing date of March 23, 1995, at 2:00 P.M. to the NEW closing date of April 20, 1995 at 2:00 P.M. 2. The anticipated council date will be May 11, 1995. 3_ Drawings and specifications shall include the enclosed pages. 4. Please find enclosed the events calendar for the Coliseum and Theater/Exhibit Hall and the prebid sign -in sheet. THANK YOU, Ron Shu field Senior Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY WITH YOUR BID ii'Mazo-l-, j f City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 BOB-767-2167 MAILED TO VENDOR: OLD CLOSE DATE: NEW CLOSE DATE: Office of Purchasing March 14,1995 @ 4:00 P.M. March 23, 1995 2:00 P.M. April 20, 1995 @ 2:00 P.M. BID #13193 - AIR CONDITIONING FOR LUBBOCK MUNICIPAL COLISEUM ADDENDUM # 1 Please modify or amend Contract Documents as follows: 1. The closing date for this project has been changed from the old closing date of March 23, 1995, at 2:00 P.M. to the NEW closing date of April 20, 1995 at 2:00 P.M. 2. The anticipated council date will be May 11, 1995. 3_ Drawings and specifications shall include the enclosed pages. 4. Please find enclosed the events calendar for the Coliseum and Theater/Exhibit Hall and the prebid sign -in sheet. THANK YOU, Ron Shu field Senior Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY WITH YOUR BID LUBBOCK COLISEUM AIR CONDITIONING ADDENDUM NO. 1 1. In the Specifications, SECTION 2A EARTHWORK, Paragraph FIELD QUALITY CONTROL, add the following under the heading Tunnel Wall Backfill: Field density tests may be required each day the tunnel wall backfill is being placed at the discretion of the Engineer. In Paragraph DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS, add ' the following: The Owner's designated stockpile is north of Central Heating and Cooling Plant No. 2 and west of Texas Tech University Health Sciences Center. Material to be used as backfill may be stockpiled on this site. 2. In the Specifications, SECTION 3A CONCRETE WORK, Paragraph DESCRIPTION OF WORK, add the following: The ' Contractor under Section 3A shall remove a portion of an South existing sidewalk and install a new sidewalk at the as indicated location shown on Sheet E-5 after installation of the clock Channel 6 for Team Locker electrical service. four Alternate No. 2: Provide control as indicated for time 3. Add the attached SECTION 7A SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING i to the Contract Documents. together. Piping shall be as shown for Units 21 - 24 on. 4. In the Specifications, SECTION 15L TEMPERATURE 4: Replace REGULATION, Paragraph SCOPE, revise the last sentence of the second paragraph to read: The wiring shall be Concessions" performed by this Contractor in accordance with diagrams "four on the plans, as specified herein and as indicated on the air conditioning units serving drawings, which this contractor shall provide using South materials and construction methods as specified in Division 16. No labor and materials are included in as indicated Division 16. time Part II, Paragraph CONTROL PANEL (City of Lubbock} and clock Channel 6 for Team Locker Part III, Paragraph COLISEUM AIR CONDITIONING. Under four Alternate No. 2: Provide control as indicated for time clock Channel 5 for four air conditioning units serving be as the Concourse. All four units shall start and stop together. Piping shall be as shown for Units 21 - 24 on. with valves Sheet M-9 with valves as shown on detail for chilled water coils on Sheet M-8. Under Alternate No. 3 and No. 4: Replace " two air conditioning units serving the Concessions" with "four air conditioning units serving North and South Team Locker Rooms". Provide control as indicated for time clock Channel 6 for Team Locker Rooms. All four units shall start and stop together. Piping shall be as shown for Units 25 and 26 on Sheet M-9 with valves as shown on detail for chilled water coils on Sheet M-8. Note: 5 on Sheet 10 shall read: "Temperature Control Subcontractor shall provide throttling valves and thermostats with summer\winter change over sequence based upon temperature sensors on the supply water piping to the units." 5. In the Specifications, SECTION 16H MOTORS AND EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND WIRING, Paragraph TEMPERATURE CONTROLS, replace the paragraph with: All work for temperature controls will be done by the Contractor under Division 16. No materials or labor for temperature controls is included in Division 16. 6. On the Plans, Sheet S-1, add the following Note: The 16" city water main crossing the construction site has been ' reported to be bell and spigot cast iron pipe with either caulked joints or flexible couplings. The 10" well water line crossing the construction site has been reported to be bell and spigot schedule 40 PVC with 0 ring couplings. Some fittings are epoxy welded. Both lines have cast concrete anchors at turns and ends. The Contractor is required to exercise due care to support the piping and guide the piping to prevent damage to the piping or serious leaks into the excavation. Contractor shall include all costs for supporting, guiding and maintaining the piping in service and shall repair and/or replace all damaged piping. 7. On Sheet M-7, in the Concourse/Coliseum Cross Section, add the following note: The piping may be supported from anchor I beam either above or below the beam at the Contractor's choice. The piping may be supported at each beam and in between each beam on approximately 12' C/C. 8. On Sheet E-2 add a manual fire alarm pull station in the maintenance office adjacent to the fire alarm control panel. Connect to the fire alarm panel for operation as described on Page 16E-3 of the Specifications. End of Addendum No. 1 Office of Purchasing City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texes 71457 806-767-2167 MAILED TO VENDOR: April 3,1995 CLOSE DATE: April 20,1995 @ 2:00 P.M. BID #13193 - AIR CONDITIONING FOR LUBBOCK MUNICIPAL COLISEUM ADDENDUM # 3 Please modify or amend Contract Documents as per the attached sheets. THOK YOU, Ron ShuB'ield Senior Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY WITH YOUR BID 1. 2. LUBBOCK COLISEUM AIR CONDITIONING ADDENDUM ITEMS In the Specifications, Section ISA, Page 3, "Opening and Reciosing Pavements": Revise the Iast sentence to read as follows: Provide a 8" thick reinforced concrete protective slab 4"0" wider than the ditch under the patch. In the Specifications, Section 15B, replace the original Section 15B with the attached Section 15B (Revised), including the piping Shop Drawing Sheet 15B-2 Attachment. 3. In the Specifications, Section 15D, Page 1, "Materials": Insert "Schedule 40" before "seamless" in the second paragraph. Replace "High Pressure Steam" with "Condensate" in the third paragraph. Insert "Schedule 80" before "seamless" in the fourth paragraph. Delete the fifth paragraph. 4. 5. Page 2, Delete the first and third paragraphs. Revise the last sentence of the seventh paragraph to read: Gaskets for high pressure steam and condensate line joints shall be TOPOG-E molded flexible gaskets suitable for 180 PSI/380 deg. F service. Page 5, Delete the last sentence. In the Specifications, Section 15E, Page 1, "SCOPE": Revise the third paragraph to read: The Texas Tech University chilled water system piping addition shall be Standard weight black steel, ASTM A-120 or A -53 -Grade B electric resistance welded pipe. Piping larger than 2" shall be assembled by welding. Lines 2" and smaller may be screwed using malleable iron banded fittings. Separate by valves from the City of Lubbock system. In the Specifications, Section 15I, Page 1, "SCOPE": Add to the last sentence "with metal jacket." A. Page 3, "INSULATION ON EQUIPMENT AND PIPING SYSTEMS: In the third paragraph insert "METAL ON" between "Thermo -12" and molded pipe covering.. In the fourth paragraph revise the fourth sentence to read as follows: B. Lines 3" and smaller in size shall be covered with 1 '/z" thick insulation and lines 4" and larger in size shall be covered with 3" thick insulation. Addendum No. 2-1 AM Cl 7. 1.1 At the bottom of Page 3 add the following: In the Texas Tech University tunnel all steam and condensate piping insulation shall have a metal jacket, (except trap assemblies up to the unions) C. Page 4, Delete the first and second paragraph. "Steam and Condensate Piping:" Revise the first sentence of the fourth paragraph to read as follows: In the City of Lubbock tunnel and in the Coliseum on the above insulated lines, the outer jackets on all lines exposed in any space, including machinery rooms, shall be glass cloth. Delete the last two paragraphs. D. Page 5, Delete the first three paragraphs. In the Specifications, Section 15L, replace the original section 15L with the attached Section 15L (Revised), including the point charts and control diagram. In the Specifications, Section 15L-2, Equipment, add the following paragraph: Starters: Starters, except those furnished as an integral part of the equipment as specified herein, shall be combination (starter/disconnect devices and shall be furnished under Division 15. Coordinate exact starter requirements and details. Starters shall be installed by the contractor under Division 16. Refer to the electrical drawings for starters installed in motor control centers, which shall be provided under Division 16. Carefully coordinate starter requirements with the Division 16 contractor. All starters shall be provided with control transformers, auxiliary contacts, overloads, and HAND- OFF -AUTO switches. Furnish starters and disconnects with HOA switches and control transformers for six existing exhaust fans (3 HP, 208V/3PH) and two existing pumps (existing condensing water pump and existing hot/chilled water pump). Provide remote HOA swtiches with exhaust fans. In the Specifications, Section 16H: A. The Contractor under Division 15 will furnish new combination starters/disconnects for the six existing exhaust fans in the upper level of the Coliseum. These fans are located as shown on Sheet M3 (at the catwalk). The Contractor under Division 16 shall remove the old starters and install and connect the new starter unit. The Contractor under Division 15 will provide six remote HOA switches for these exhaust fans. The Contractor under Division 16 shall remove the existing remote PB stations and install Addendum No. 2-2 the remote HOA switches. This location is on the lower level NW end, SE of the First Aid Room. Control wiring will be furnished and installed under Division 15. B. The Contractor under Division 15 will provide combination starter disconnect units for the existing condensing waiter pump, and the existing heating/chilled water pump. These pumps are located in the Basement as shown on Sheet M4. The Contractor under Division 16 shall remove the old starters, and install the new starter units and connect the power wiring. Control wiring will be furnished and installed under Division 15. 9. On the Drawings, Sheet E3: Change the location of the Motor Control Center "MCC" to the location shown on attached Sheet E -3R1. Change the feeder routing as shown on that sheet. 10. On the Drawings, Sheet E4: Change the location of Switchboard "MSB" to the location shown on attached Sheet E -4R1. Route the associated service and feeder conduits as shown on that sheet. 1 Addendum No. 2-3 ' SECTION 15B - PIPING AND ACCESSORIES PART I - GENERAL NOTE: Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. SUBMITTALS• Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. � a SCOPE• This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the piping and accessories as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. INSPECTION• All pipe, valves, fittings, and other accessories shall be inspected upon delivery and during the course of the work. Any defective materials found during field inspection or during hydrostatic and leakage tests shall be removed from the site of the ' work and replaced by the Contractor. Protection During Storage: The interior of all pipe, fittings, and other accessories shall be kept free from dirt and foreign matter 1 at all times. Valves and fittings shall be drained and stored in a manner that will protect them from damage by freezing. PART II - PRODUCTS MATERIALS• All materials shall be manufactured or fabricated in the United States of America. ( Materials shall conform to the listed standards. Refer to specific sections for materials to be used under that section. The following tabulation is for reference only to identify the " applicable standard. V Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings ASTM A74, Class SV Push On Gaskets for C.T. Soil Pipe ASTM 0564 No Hub Joints ASTM D3183 Copper Tubing ASTM B75-76 Wrought Copper Solder Fittings ANSI B16.22 Cast Bronze Solder Fittings ANSI B16.18 15B-1 93008 (REVISED) Steel Pipe ASTM A1201 A53, A106 Butt Weld Fittings ANSI B16.9 Socket Weld Fittings ANSI B16.11. Steel Flanges ANSI B16.5 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings ANSI B16.3 Flange Bolt, Sets ASME Pressure Piping Unions in Ferrous Lines: 150 pound malleable iron, screwed pattern, ground joint with brass to iron seat; equal to Crane. Insulating Fittings: Equal to Maloney. Unions in Copper or Brass Lines: 125 pound all brass, screwed pattern, ground joint, equal to Chase, Crane or Mueller. Mechanical Couplings: Victaulic Style 77 Gaskets in Steam and Condensate Return Lines: Equal to TOPOG-E molded flexible gaskets, suitable for 180 psi - 380 deg. F. use. PREINSULATED PIPING: Preinsulated Hot/Chilled Water Piping may be used in the City of Lubbock tunnel and in the coliseum at the contractor's option in lieu of steel piping with field applied insulation. All hot/chilled water lines may be preinsulated prefabricated piping, RTRP "VEE -rite" 250, as manufactured by Thermal Pipe Systems, Inc. Approved equal piping by Insul Pipe or Thermacore will be considered. Each section is factory fabricated of straight standard 20 foot lengths of reinforced thermosetting resin plastic (RTRP) pipe with special couplings. A shop drawing illustrating the construction and assembly details is attached herein for the Contractor's information. Submit drawings for all field joints. A representative of the manufacturer shall be present during critical periods of installation and testing to verify that the installation is being made in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. one pipe end consists of a male EPDM seal and the other end consists of a female PVC casing. A grooved RTRP coupling in the male end has "o" ring seals for joining the RTRP pipe joints. The outer jacket is PVC tubing with polyurethane foam insulation. Field connections to the preinsulated pipe sections shall be made using standard RTRP Bell and Spigot fittings assembled with adhesive to meet system requirements. Enclose the joints in a jacket made of PVC tubing sections to match the preinsulated sections. Foam polyurethane insulation into the void between the fittings and the jacket. Use special fitting where connections are made to copper tubing, ferrous piping and equipment. 15B-2 93008 (REVISED) 8 CASING SIZE DA NOW ■'mil/// 7 DD Tc Tl 2 n DD Dc' 2 H3L- W,1Q' AND 12' VEE -ME 1IIALL HAVE A 2 RINQ COUPLING AS SHOWN ABOVE L UQJLL2--0 VEE -Illi 'WILL MAVt. A OUNUW 1 RING COUPLING AS SHOWN ABOVE 1) CARRIER: RTRP Pipe 2) INSULATION: Polyurethane Foam 3 CASING: Polyvinyl Chloride 4 ENO SEAL• H.T.Rubber 5 COUPLING: Grooved FRP 6) CARRIER SEALING RINGS: H.T.Rubber 7 CASING --TITS COUPLING: PVC 8) CASING SEALING RINGS: H.T.Rubber T Tc Dg T, Tc PIPE SIZE CASING SIZE DA NOW ■'mil/// Dc DD Tc DD Dc' 2 H3L- W,1Q' AND 12' VEE -ME 1IIALL HAVE A 2 RINQ COUPLING AS SHOWN ABOVE L UQJLL2--0 VEE -Illi 'WILL MAVt. A OUNUW 1 RING COUPLING AS SHOWN ABOVE 1) CARRIER: RTRP Pipe 2) INSULATION: Polyurethane Foam 3 CASING: Polyvinyl Chloride 4 ENO SEAL• H.T.Rubber 5 COUPLING: Grooved FRP 6) CARRIER SEALING RINGS: H.T.Rubber 7 CASING --TITS COUPLING: PVC 8) CASING SEALING RINGS: H.T.Rubber T Tc Dg T, Tc PIPE SIZE CASING SIZE DA D8 Dc DD Tc Tl WIEGHT LBS. SEC. 2 4 3.52 2.38 4.22 4.50 .14 .92 34.4 3 6 4.82 3.50 5.90 6.14 .12 1.2 57.4 4 8 5.82 4.50 1 7.84 8.16 .16 1.67 94.4 6 10 7.94 6.63 1 9.80 10.2 .20 1.59 152.0 8 12 10.86 8.63 11.76 12.24 .24 1.57 213.6 10 15 12.03 10:75 14.70 15.3 .30 1.98 328.2 11 1 52.0 15°-2 ATTACHMENT REV 1, 9 AWAY 19a9 VALVES. General Service Valves: 31" and smaller, all bronze, screwed; 3-1/21" and larger, flanged, riron body, bronze trimmed, equal to the following Crane Nos: Type Fluid Pressure Fluid Pressure Below 125 PSIG Above 125 PSIG Swing Check Valves 21" and Smaller: All bronze screwed, equal to Crane No. 37 for pressures to 125 psi or No. 36 for pressures to 200 psi SWP or 400 PSI WOG. Swing Check Valves 2-1/2" and Larger: Iron body, flanged, bronze trimmed; equal to Crane No. 373 for pressures to 125 psi or No. 39E for pressures from 125 psi to 250 psi. Butterfly Valves: Cast or ductile iron body, flanged or with drilled and tapped lugs, bronze discs, stainless steel shafts with bronze bushings, resilient EPDM seats and O -rings, "Bubble Tight" shut-off at 150 psi pressure. On valves 41" and smaller, handle shall be infinite position with memory stops. On valves 6" and larger, provide geared operators. Norris, Keystone, Center Line, Demco or Crane valves are acceptable. Where valves are installed in insulated lines, provide extended stems so that the handle will clear the insulation and jacket. Trunnion Valves: Posi-Seal trunnion valve with 150 PSIG flanges, carbon steel valve with nickel plated body and disc, teflon packing, teflon seal, Buna O-ring, 316 stainless steel bearings and with a gear driven operator. Furnish these valves with pneumatic actuators for the Texas Tech University chilled water system access to Municipal Coliseum. 0 W. 15B-3 93008 (REVISED) Gate 31" and smaller 428 424 Gate 3-1/2" and larger 465-1/2 7-1/2 E Globe 3" and smaller 1 14-1/2 P Globe 3-1/21' and larger 351 21E Angle 31" and smaller 2 16-1/2 P ' Angle 3-1/21" and larger 353 23E Where valves have discs, select the discs for the intended service using materials as recommended by the valve manufacturer. Provide extended stems for valves in insulated lines, so that the handle clears the insulation and jacket. 1 Acceptable General Service Valve Manufacturers: Stockham, Jenkins, OIC, Walworth, Hammond. Swing Check Valves 21" and Smaller: All bronze screwed, equal to Crane No. 37 for pressures to 125 psi or No. 36 for pressures to 200 psi SWP or 400 PSI WOG. Swing Check Valves 2-1/2" and Larger: Iron body, flanged, bronze trimmed; equal to Crane No. 373 for pressures to 125 psi or No. 39E for pressures from 125 psi to 250 psi. Butterfly Valves: Cast or ductile iron body, flanged or with drilled and tapped lugs, bronze discs, stainless steel shafts with bronze bushings, resilient EPDM seats and O -rings, "Bubble Tight" shut-off at 150 psi pressure. On valves 41" and smaller, handle shall be infinite position with memory stops. On valves 6" and larger, provide geared operators. Norris, Keystone, Center Line, Demco or Crane valves are acceptable. Where valves are installed in insulated lines, provide extended stems so that the handle will clear the insulation and jacket. Trunnion Valves: Posi-Seal trunnion valve with 150 PSIG flanges, carbon steel valve with nickel plated body and disc, teflon packing, teflon seal, Buna O-ring, 316 stainless steel bearings and with a gear driven operator. Furnish these valves with pneumatic actuators for the Texas Tech University chilled water system access to Municipal Coliseum. 0 W. 15B-3 93008 (REVISED) Ball Valves: Bronze threaded body, chrome plated full port bronze ball, teflon seats and O -rings, bronze shafts, and infinite position handle with memory stops. Memory stops may be deleted for domestic water service. Valve shall be three piece break away for in-line service. Apollo, . Crane, 'Jamesbury and Stockham are acceptable. Ring type two piece ball valves are not acceptable, except for drain line service. Where valves are installed in insulated lines, provide extended stems to clear the insulation and jacket. EXPANSION JOINTS: Furnish and install as shown on the drawings, equalizing expansion joints as manufactured by Zallea Brothers or Adsco. Joints shall have flanged ends unless otherwise noted. The bellows be hydraulically formed from an Inconel metal tube having only longitudinal seams. The weld bead of the seam, without grinding, shall be the same thickness as the parent metal. Where required, the bellows shall be annealed and/or stress relieved in furnaces automatically controlled by a recording Potentiometer. Before assembly, the corrugated bellow must be pickled to remove all scale formed by annealing and passivated to provide the maximum corrosion resistance. All lines in which expansion joints are installed must be securely anchored and guided in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. GAUGE COCKS AND GAUGES: Where gauge connections are installed in insulated lines, install a ConBraCo No. 41-380 T -handle gauge cock on a nipple of sufficient length that the cock handle will be free of the pipe insulation, and position each cock in relation to surrounding piping and 15B-4 93008 (REVISED) Internal Inconel sleeves shall be required on all steam joints. The sleeves shall be for suitable reverse flow. Expansion joints for installation in steam lines shall be self ' equalizing expansion joints with equalizing rings and internal guides and suitable for 150 psig working pressure. Expansion joints for installation in pumped return lines shall be self equalizing joints suitable for 100 psig working pressure. Expansion joints for installation in chilled water lines shall be self equalizing joints suitable for 100 psig working pressure. The joints shall be shipped compressed for installation at 80 degrees F. and shall be securely fastened and labeled. GAUGE COCKS AND GAUGES: Where gauge connections are installed in insulated lines, install a ConBraCo No. 41-380 T -handle gauge cock on a nipple of sufficient length that the cock handle will be free of the pipe insulation, and position each cock in relation to surrounding piping and 15B-4 93008 (REVISED) equipment so that the gauge may be easily read, and so that a gauge having a 6" diameter dial can be screwed into and out of the cock. Install gauge cocks at pumps as close to pump suction and discharge connections as possible., Where drilled and tapped gauge connections are provided in the pump casing by the manufacturer, use these tappings. Pressure Gauges: Phosphor bronze, seamless Bourdon spring type with phosphor bronze bushed rotary movement and link; 4-1/2" dial, nickel plated ring, free standing cast aluminum case; equipped with micrometer adjustment pointer. Furnish each gauge with scale range suitable for the duty. Water Pressure Gauges: Equal to Weksler No. BA14-I with cast aluminum case, or EA -14 with stainless steel case; Weksler, Weiss, and Trerice acceptable. Steam Pressure Gauges: Equal to Weksler No. BA14-I with cast aluminum case, mounted on coiled pipe (pigtail) siphons; Weksler, Weiss, Trerice acceptable. THERMOMETER WELLS: Furnish and install brass or stainless steel closed separable thermometer wells for all thermometer and controller bulbs which. are designated for liquid measurements. Whenever a thermometer or controller bulb is inserted in a pipe for either remote or local temperature indication or control, locate the thermometer well so that it will be completely surrounded by flowing fluid. Such thermometer locations as shown on the drawings are diagrammatic only -install thermometer wells for maximum effectiveness and in the case of locally indicating instruments, for easy readability. Test Wells: Test wells for use with etched stem thermometers shall be Bolton No. 615 brass, with a threaded brass plug and keeper chain. Install these test wells so that they can be filled with oil to facilitate temperature measurements. MERCURIAL THERMOMETERS: Industrial type with Cycolac plastic cases, glass fronts, 9" scale, adjustable straight or angle pattern as required for ready readability. Furnish thermometers with 2-1/21' stem extensions where they are installed in insulated lines. Select scale ranges for maximum readability at the design temperature of the medium being measured. Thermometer equal to Weksler No. AA5H9. Acceptable Manufacturers: Weksler, Trerice, Weiss, Moeller. 15B-5 93008 (REVISED) COMBINATION PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE PORT: Furnish and install where indicated "Pete's Plug" a 1/4" MPT fitting to receive either a temperature or pressure probe 1/8" OD. Fitting shall be solid brass with valve core of neoprene fitted with cap with gasket. Furnish an extended stem as required to extend through pipe insulation where installed in insulated lines. PART III - EXECUTION ' INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS: Install runs of piping essentially as indicated on the drawings and/or as required. The location, direction and size of the various lines are indicated on the drawings. I 1 Make up all systems straight and true and properly graded for correct flow of contained materials and to provide drainage. Cut pipes accurately to measurements established at the building and work into place without forcing or springing. Except as required for specified grading, run all piping above ground parallel with the lines of the building. Make all changes in pipe sizes with reducing fittings. Use no long screws or bushings. Install and support piping systems with loops, bends, expansion joints and/or flexible connectors as required for flexibility, to accommodate expansion and contraction of piping due to temperature changes in the contained fluids and in the surrounding space, and to minimize the transmission of vibration to the building structure. Provide unions in the lines assembled with screwed and soldered fittings, at points of connection to equipment, and elsewhere as indicated or required to permit proper connections to be made, or to permit valves, equipment items, etc. to be removed. Provide unions also in welded lines at connections to equipment where flanges are not provided. Provide insulating unions where ferrous material joins non-ferrous material. In piping systems assembled by welding, use factory -fabricated welding fittings of the same material and the same schedule or weight as the piping in which they are installed, except that branches or take -offs of sizes not exceeding 2/3 of the nominal diameter of the mains may be made with Bonney Weldolets or Thredolets. Mitering of pipe to form elbows, notching of straight runs to form tees, and any similar construction will not be permitted. P 15B-6 93008 (REVISED) I In general, use listed materials in fabricating the various piping systems. The method of assembly may be varied only to meet special conditions where it is impossible to comply with the specified method of joining piping. Where special classes of piping are involved and are not listed,,request exact instructions as to the class of material involved and the method of fabricating it before ordering materials. FABRICATION OF PIPE JOINTS: Push -On Pipe: The inside of the bell and the outside of the spigot shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove oil, grit, excess coating, and other foreign matter. The circular rubber gasket shall be flexed inward and inserted in the gasket recess of the bell socket. A thin film of gasket lubricant shall be applied to either the inside surface of the gasket or the spigot end of the pipe or both. Gasket lubricant shall be as supplied by the pipe manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. The spigot end of the pipe shall be entered into the socket with care used to keep the joint from contacting the ground. The joint shall then be completed by forcing the plain end to the bottom of the socket with a forked tool or jack type tool or other device.. Pipe that is not furnished with a depth mark shall be marked before assembly to assure that the spigot end is inserted to the full depth of the joint. Field cut pipe lengths shall be filed or ground to resemble the spigot end of such pipe as manufactured. Complete assembly instructions from the pipe manufacturer shall be followed. Threaded Pipes: Ream and deburr pipe after it is cut and before it is threaded. Stand each pipe on one end and hammer to remove all foreign material. Full cut threads, but not more than 3 pipe threads shall remain exposed when joint is completed. Make up joints with graphite and oil or an approved graphite compound applied to male threads only. Caulking of threaded joints to stop or prevent leaks is prohibited. Copper Tubing: Cut tubing square and deburr. Clean insides of fittings and outsides of tubing with sand cloth before assembly. Exercise care to prevent annealing of fittings and hard drawn tubing. Make all joints with solid string or wire solder, using non --corrosive paste flux of the proper type for each application. No cored solder will be permitted. Use 95-5 solder (95% tin, 5% antimony) or Silvabrite 100 solder (95.5% tin, 4% copper, .5$ silver composition) for all copper tubing. Under no circumstances will solder with any lead content be permitted on the jobsite. Welded Joints: Make all welded joints by the metallic arc process. Use base material conforming to ANSI B31.1 for welded pipe ASTM A106 and ASTM A53. Use filler material conforming to ASTM A233 and 93008 15B-7 (REVISED) ' In general, use listed materials in fabricating the various piping systems. The method of assembly may be varied only to meet special conditions where it is impossible to comply with the specified method of joining piping. Where special classes of piping are involved and are not listed, request exact instructions as to the class of material involved and the method of fabricating it before ordering materials. r 1 93008 END OF SECTION 15B-8 (REVISED) in accordance with ANSI B31.1. Machine the ends of the material to be joined or gas cut. Make the cut smooth in order that good fit can be made and a full penetration weld made. Use direct current for welding with the electrode positive. Limit the depth of deposit to 1s assembled with screwed and soldered fittings, at points of connection to equipment, and elsewhere as indicated or required to permit proper connections to be made, or to permit valves, equipment items, etc. to be removed. Provide unions also in welded lines at connections to equipment where flanges are not provided. Provide insulating unions where ferrous material joins non-ferrous material. In piping systems assembled by welding, use factory -fabricated welding fittings of the same material and the same schedule or weight as the piping in which they are installed, except that branches or take -offs of sizes not exceeding 2/3 of the nominal diameter of the mains may be made with Bonney Weldolets or Thredolets. Mitering of pipe to form elbows, notching of straight runs to form tees, and any similar construction will not be permitted. ' In general, use listed materials in fabricating the various piping systems. The method of assembly may be varied only to meet special conditions where it is impossible to comply with the specified method of joining piping. Where special classes of piping are involved and are not listed, request exact instructions as to the class of material involved and the method of fabricating it before ordering materials. r 1 93008 END OF SECTION 15B-8 (REVISED) SECTION 15L - TEMPERATURE REGULATION & BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEMS PART I - GENERAL NOTE: Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements and Supplemental Conditions. SUBMITTALS• submit manufacturer's data on all materials and equipment. Include system schematics indicating all devices, existing and added in pneumatic piping, electrical wiring and sequence of operation. Sequence of operation shall reference each component device by designation used on schematics. SCOPE: This Contractor shall include in his bid an amount necessary to cover a complete system of automatic temperature regulating equipment. It is intended the utility valves V1 and V2 be pneumatic in operation. The Coliseum air conditioning system shall have pneumatic control operation except for certain sensing functions, remote starting and stopping provisions, resetting arrangements, and alarm indications which can best be performed by electronic instruments. It shall include all master and submaster thermostats, valves, dampers, and operators, amplifiers, air receivers, switches, piping, air regulator, relays, multiplexers, cabinets, etc. required to make it complete in full accordance with the intent of the plans and the following description. Wiring for all the remote indicating, motor control, control set point and adjustment and alarm devices shall originate in an energy management system (EMS) cabinet with PC terminal board and modem and extend to and connect to all multiplexers, relays, thermocouples, and similar devices. The wiring (including conduit installation) shall be performed by the Contractor this section in accordance with diagrams on the plans, as specified herein and as indicated on the drawings which this contractor shall provide. Refer to Division 16 specifications for products and methods for wiring. The temperature regulation equipment shall be installed and adjusted to secure the sequences described hereinafter. The materials and equipment described herein shall be sufficient to any of the remote devices of reference elsewhere herein, but shall be arranged as required to operate in conjunction with those remote devices. in P 15L-1 93008 (REVISED) W The Contractor shall furnish and install all automatic dampers except those furnished in the air units, and all automatic valves. The Contractor shall furnish, install, and adjust all damper and valve operators and all other switches, relays, etc. comprising the temperature regulation system. Temperature regulation specified herein is based on Johnson Controls. Johnson Controls or Honeywell will be considered for the Coliseum temperature control system. The control valves and flow sensors must be compatible with the existing campus Johnson Controls system by transmitting standard protocol (4-20mA, 0-10VDC) signals. PART II - PRODUCTS COMPRESSED AIR: Existing Texas Tech University instrument air supply may be used to operate the remote control valves located in the Texas Tech University tunnel vault. PNEUMATIC AIR IN COLISEUM: The existing air compressor will be reused to provide control air. This Contractor shall begin at the existing air line, connect 1" to the service and extend it according to the various requirements cited by, and inherent to, the descriptions herein. A manual valve shall be provided to allow isolation of the building from the service. Verify the location of the existing air line. Provide a ball valve at connection point. PIPING• All exposed tubing and conduit shall be run parallel to or at right angles to the building structure and shall be concealed in all finished spaces. Tubing may be run exposed in mechanical rooms or areas where other piping is exposed. Hard drawn copper tubing shall be used where run exposed and either hard drawn or annealed where concealed. Only tool -made bends will be acceptable. Fittings for copper tubing shall be brass or copper solder -joint type, except at connections to apparatus, where brass compression -type fittings shall be used. Non-metallic tubing may be used in lieu of copper only inside control cabinets or for flexibility with short runs (24" maximum) to controls, and shall be virgin polyethylene, meeting stress -crack test ASTM D1693 -60T. Tubing shall be self -extinguishing under ASTM -D635 flammability test. Number -coded polyethylene shall be used inside control cabinets and shall be neatly tied and supported. Flexible connections bridging the cabinet and its door shall be neatly fastened along the hinge -side and protected against abrasion. 15L-2 93008 (REVISED) BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: Building automation system shall be Direct Digital Control (DDC) with electronic sensing elements and operated with pneumatic, electric or electric/hydraulic motors for actuators. DDC system shall include air unit controllers and equipment controllers with a network to a central data processor, all with PID algorithm capability. City of Lubbock will furnish one or more compatible PC computers, modems and a printer. The system shall be capable of logging any DDC sensing and/or control points and either printing or reporting data logs and trends by individual sensor, air unit or other equipment. Also, processor shall be capable of responding to modem requests for data logs and trends from local terminals in Lubbock, TX or other remote locations. Minimum points of control shall conform to the attached DDC point schedule. EMS system shall be equal to Johnson Metasys and shall be capable of communication with Metasys systems at Municipal Square or with Deltanet Honeywell system at the Memorial Civic Center. GENERAL PRODUCT DESCRIPTION: The Facility Management System shall be capable of integrating multiple building functions including equipment supervision and control, alarm management, energy management, and historical data collection and archiving. The facility management system shall consist of the following: 1. Standalone DDC panels 2. Standalone application specific controllers (ASCs) 3. Portable Operator's Terminals 4. Personal Computer Operator Workstations. The system shall be modular in nature, and shall permit expansion of both capacity and functionality through the addition of sensors, actuators, standalone DDC panels, and operator devices. System architectural design shall eliminate dependence upon any single device for alarm reporting and control execution. Each DDC panel shall operate independently by performing its own specified control, alarm management, operator I/©, and historical data collection. The failure of any single component or network connection shall not interrupt the execution of control strategies at other operational devices. Standalone DDC panels shall be able to access any data from, or send control commands and alarm reports directly to any other DDC panel or combination of panels on the network without dependence upon a central processing device. Standalone DDC panels shall also be able to send alarm reports to multiple operator workstations without dependence upon a central processing device. 15L-3 r 93008 (REVISED) NETWORKING/COMMUNICATIONS: The design of the FMS shall network operator workstations and Standalone DDC Panels as shown on the attached system configuration drawing. Inherent in the system's design shall be the ability to expand or modify the network either via the a local area network, or auto -dial telephone line modem connections, or via a combination of the two networking schemes. Local Area Network: 1. Workstation/DDC Panel Support: Operator workstations and DDC panels shall directly reside on a local area network such that communications may be executed directly between controllers, directly between workstations, and between controllers and workstations on a peer-to-peer basis. 2. Dynamic Data Access: All operator devices, either network resident or connected via dial-up modems, shall have the ability to access all point status and application report data, or execute control functions for any and all other devices via the local area network. Access to data shall be based upon logical identification of building equipment. Access to system data shall not be restricted by the hardware configuration of the facility management system. The hardware configuration of the FMS network shall be totally transparent to the user when accessing data or developing control programs. 3. General Network Design: Network design shall include the following provisions: a. High speed data transfer rates for alarm reporting, quick report generation from multiple controllers, and upload/download efficiency between network devices. The minimum baud rate shall be 1 Megabaud b. Support of any combination of controllers and operator workstations directly connected to the local area network. A minimum of 50 devices shall be supported on a single local area network. C. Detection and accommodation of single or multiple failures of either workstations, DDC panels or the network media. The network shall include provisions for automatically reconfiguring itself to allow all operational equipment to perform their designated functions as effectively as possible in the event of single or multiple failures. d. Message and alarm buffering to prevent information from being lost. e. Error detection, correction, and retransmission to guarantee data integrity. 15L-4 93008 (REVISED) 2. Dial -Up Workstations: Operators at dial-up workstations shall be able to perform all control functions, all report functions, and all database generation and modification functions as described for workstations connected via the local area network. Routines shall be provided to automatically answer calls, and either file or display information sent from remote DDC panels. The fact that communications is taking place with remote control systems over telephone lines shall be completely transparent to an operator. a. An operator shall be able to access remote buildings by selection of any facility by its logical name. The PC Dial -Up program shall maintain a user -definable cross-reference of buildings and associated telephone numbers, so the user shall not be required to remember or manually dial telephone numbers. I 15L-5 93008 (REVISED) I f. Default device definition to prevent loss of alarms or data, and ensure alarms are reported as quickly as possible in the event an operator device does not respond. g. Commonly available, multiple sourced, networking components I and protocols shall •be used to allow the FMS to coexist with other networking applications such as office automation. MAP, ETHERNET, IBM Token Ring and ARCNET are acceptable technologies. h. Use of an industry standard IEEE 802.x protocol. Communications must be of a deterministic nature to assure calculable performance under worst-case network loading. i. Synchronization of the realtime clocks in all DDC panels shall be provided. Dial -Up Communications: Auto-dial/auto-answer communications shall be provided to allow standalone DDC panels to communicate with remote operator stations on an intermittent basis via telephone lines. 1. Dial -Up Standalone DDC Panels: Auto -Dial panels shall automatically place calls to workstations to report critical alarms, or to upload trend and historical information for archiving. a. Standalone DDC Panels shall analyze and prioritize all alarms to minimize the initiation of calls. Non-critical alarms shall be buffered in memory and reported as a group of alarms, or until an operator manually requests an upload of all alarms. b. The auto -dial program shall include provisions for handling busy signals, "no -answers", and incomplete data transfers. Default devices shall be called when communications cannot be established with primary devices. 2. Dial -Up Workstations: Operators at dial-up workstations shall be able to perform all control functions, all report functions, and all database generation and modification functions as described for workstations connected via the local area network. Routines shall be provided to automatically answer calls, and either file or display information sent from remote DDC panels. The fact that communications is taking place with remote control systems over telephone lines shall be completely transparent to an operator. a. An operator shall be able to access remote buildings by selection of any facility by its logical name. The PC Dial -Up program shall maintain a user -definable cross-reference of buildings and associated telephone numbers, so the user shall not be required to remember or manually dial telephone numbers. I 15L-5 93008 (REVISED) I b. A PC workstation may serve as an operator device on a local area network, as well as a dial-up workstation for multiple auto -dial DDC panels or networks. Alarm and data file transfers handled via dial-up transactions shall not interfere with local area network activity, nor shall local area network activity keep the workstation from handling incoming calls. 3. Modem Characteristics: Dial-up communications shall make use of Hayes compatible 300/1200 baud modems and voice grade telephone lines. Each standalone DDC panel may have its own modem, or a group of Standalone DDC panels may share a modem. a STANDALONE DDC PANELS: General: Standalone DDC panels shall be microprocessor based, multi -tasking, multi-user, real-time digital control processors. Each standalone DDC panel shall consist of modular hardware with plug-in enclosed processors, communication controllers, power supplies, and input/output modules. A sufficient number of controllers shall be supplied to fully meet the requirements of this specification and the attached point list. Memory: Each DDC panel shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system and databases including: - Control processes - Energy Management Applications - Alarm Management - Historical/Trend Data for all points - Maintenance Support Applications - Custom Processes - Operator I/O - Dial -Up Communications - Manual Override Monitoring Point types: Each DDC panel shall support the following types of point inputs and outputs: - Digital Inputs for status/alarm contacts - Digital Outputs for on/off equipment control - Analog Inputs for temperature, pressure, humidity, flow, and position measurements - Analog Outputs for valve and damper position control, and capacity control of primary equipment - Pulse Inputs for pulsed contact monitoring Expendability: The system shall be modular in nature, and shall permit easy expansion through the addition of software applications, workstation hardware, field controllers, sensors, and actuators. 15L-6 93008 (REVISED) The system architecture shall support 25% expansion capacity of all types of DDC panels, and all point types included in the initial installation. Serial Communication Ports: Standalone DDC panels shall provide at least two RS --232C serial data communication ports for simultaneous operation of multiple operator I/O devices such as industry standard printers, laptop workstations, PC workstations, and panel mounted or portable DDC panel operator's Terminals. Standalone DDC panels shall allow temporary use of portable devices without interrupting the normal operation of permanently connected modems, printers, or network terminals. Hardware Override Switches: As indicated in the point schedule, the operator shall have the ability to manually override automatic or centrally executed commands at the DDC panel via local, point discrete, onboard hand/off/auto operator override switches for binary control points and gradual switches for analog control type points. These override switches shall be operable whether the panel is powered or not. Hardware Override Monitoring: DDC panels shall monitor the status or position of all overrides, and include this information in logs and summaries to inform the operator that automatic control has been inhibited. DDC panels shall also collect override activity information for daily and monthly reports. Local Status Indicator Lamps: The DDC panel shall provide local status indication for each binary input and output for constant, up-to-date verification of all point conditions without the need for an operator I/O device. Integrated on -Line Diagnostics: Each DDC panel shall continuously perform self -diagnostics, communication diagnosis and diagnosis of all subsidiary equipment. The DDC panel shall provide both local and remote annunciation of any detected component failures, or repeated failure to establish communication. Indication of the diagnostic results shall be provided at each DDC panel, and shall not require the connection of an operator I/O device. Surge and Transient Protection: Isolation shall be provided at all network terminations, as well as all field point terminations to suppress induced voltage transients consistent with IEEE Standard 587-1980. Isolation levels shall be sufficiently high as to allow all signal wiring to be run in the same conduit as high voltage wiring where acceptable by electrical code. Powerfail Restart: In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly shutdown of all standalone DDC panels to prevent the loss of database or operating system software. Non -Volatile memory shall be incorporated for all critical controller configuration data, and battery back-up shall be 15L-7 93008 (REVISED) provided to support the real-time clock and all volatile memory for a minimum of 72 hours. Upon restoration of normal power, the DDC panel shall automatically resume full operation without manual intervention. Should DDC panel memory be lost for any reason, the user shall have the capability of reloading the DDC panel via the local area network, via the local RS -232C port, or via telephone line dial -in. SYSTEM SOFTWARE FEATURES: General: 1. All necessary software to form a complete operating system as described in this specification shall be provided. Energy Management Applications: DDC Panels shall have the ability r to perform any or all of the following energy management routines: ' -Time of Day Scheduling Calendar Based Scheduling I 15L-8 93008 (REVISED) 2. The software programs specified in this section shall be provided as an integral part of the DDC panel and shall not be dependent upon any higher level computer for execution. Control Software Description: 1. Pre -Tested Control Algorithms: The DDC panels shall have the ability to perform the following pre -tested control algorithms: a. Two Position Control b. Proportional Control C. Proportional plus Integral Control d. Proportional, Integral, plus Derivative Control ' e. Automatic Control Loop Tuning 2. Equipment Cycling Protection: Control software shall include a provision for limiting the number of times each piece of equipment may be cycled within any one-hour period. 3. Heavy Equipment Delays: The system shall provide protection against excessive demand situations during start-up periods by automatically introducing time delays between successive start commands to heavy electrical loads. 4. Powerfail Motor Restart: Upon the resumption of normal power, the DDC panel shall analyze the status of all controlled equipment, compare it with normal occupancy scheduling, and turn equipment on or off as necessary to resume normal operation. Energy Management Applications: DDC Panels shall have the ability r to perform any or all of the following energy management routines: ' -Time of Day Scheduling Calendar Based Scheduling I 15L-8 93008 (REVISED) Holiday Scheduling Temporary Schedule Overrides Optimal Start - Optimal Stop Night Setback Control ` Enthalpy Switchover (Economizer) Peak Demand Limiting Temperature Compensated Load Rolling Fan Speed/CFM Control Heating/Cooling Interlock Cold Deck Reset Hot Deck Reset - Hot Water Reset Chilled Water Reset Condenser Water Reset Chiller Sequencing All programs shall be executed automatically without the need for operator intervention, and shall be flexible enough to allow user customization. Programs shall be applied to building equipment as described in the Execution portion of this specification. Custom Process Programming Capability: DDC panels shall be able to execute custom, job -specific processes defined by the user, to automatically perform calculations and special control routines. 1. Process Inputs and Variables: It shall be possible to use any of the following in a custom process. - Any system -measured point data or status ' - Any calculated data - Any results from other processes - User -Defined Constants - Arithmetic functions (+,-,*,/, square root, exp, etc.) - Boolean logic operators (and, or, exclusive or, etc.) - On-delay/Off-delay/One-shot timers I 2. Process Triggers: Custom processes may be triggered based on l any combination of the following: - Time interval - Time of day - Date Other processes - Time programming Events (e.g., point alarms) 3. Dynamic Data Access: A single process shall be able to incorporate measured or calculated data from any and all other DDC panels on the local area network. 15L-9 93008 (REVISED) In addition, a single process shall be able to issue commands to points in any and all other DDC panels on the local area network. 4. Advisory/Message Generation: 'Processes shall be able to generate operator messages and advisories to operator I/O devices. A process shall be able to directly send a message to a specified device, buffer the information in a follow-up file, or cause the execution of a dial-up connection to a remote device such as a printer or pager. 5. Custom Process Documentation: The custom control programming feature shall be self -documenting. All interrelationships defined by this feature shall be documented via graphical flowcharts and English language descriptors. Alarm Management: Alarm management shall be provided to monitor, buffer, and direct alarm reports to operator devices and memory files. Each DDC panel shall perform distributed, independent alarm analysis and filtering to minimize operator interruptions due to non-critical alarms, minimize network traffic, and prevent alarms from being lost. At no time shall the DDC panel's ability to report alarms be affected by either operator activity at a PC Workstation or local I/O device, or communications with other panels on the network. 1. Point Change Report Description: All alarm or point change reports shall include the point's English language description, and the time and date of occurrence. 2. Prioritization: The user shall be able to define the specific system reaction for each point. Alarms shall be prioritized to minimize nuisance reporting and to speed operator response to critical alarms. A minimum of three priority levels shall be provided. Each DDC panel shall automatically inhibit the reporting of selected alarms during system shutdown and start-up. Users shall have the ability to manually inhibit alarm reporting for each point. The user shall also be able to define under which conditions point changes need to be acknowledged by an operator, and/or sent to follow-up files for retrieval and analysis at a later date. 3. Report Routing: Alarm reports, messages, and files will be directed to a user -defined list of operator devices, or PCs used for archiving alarm information. Alarms shall also be automatically directed to a default device in the event a primary device is found to be off-line. 4. Alarm Messages: In addition to the point's descriptor and the time and date, the user shall be able to print, display or 15L-10 93008 (REVISED) store a 65 -character alarm message to more fully describe the alarm condition or direct operator response. ' Each standalone DDC panel shall be capable of storing a library of at least 250 Alarm Messages. Each message may be assignable to any number of points in the panel. 5. Auto -Dial Alarm Management: In Dial-up applications, only critical alarms shall initiate a call to a remote operator device. In all other cases, call activity shall be minimized by time -stamping and saving reports until an operator scheduled time, a manual request, or until the buffer space is full. The alarm buffer must store a minimum of 50 alarms. Historical Data and Trend Analysis: A variety of Historical data collection utilities shall be provided to automatically sample, store, and display system data in all of the following ways. 1. Continuous Point Histories: Standalone DDC panels shall store Point History Files for all analog and binary inputs and outputs. The Point History routine shall continuously and automatically sample the value of all analog inputs at half hour intervals. Samples for all points shall be stored for the past 24 hours to allow the user to immediately analyze equipment performance and all problem -related events for the past day. Point History Files for binary input or output points and analog output points shall include a continuous record of the last ten status changes or commands for each point. 2. Control Loop Performance Trends: Standalone DDC panels shall also provide high resolution sampling capability with an operator --adjustable resolution of 10-300 seconds in one -second increments for verification of control loop performance. 3. Extended Sample Period Trends: Measured and calculated analog and binary data shall also be assignable to user -definable trends for the purpose of collecting operator -specified performance data over extended periods of time. Sample intervals of 1 minute to 2 hours, in one -minute intervals, shall be provided. Each standalone DDC panel shall have a dedicated buffer for trend data, and shall be capable of storing a minimum of 5000 data samples. 4. Data Storage and Archiving: Trend data shall be stored at the Standalone DDC panels, and uploaded to hard disk storage when archival is desired. Uploads shall occur based upon either user -defined interval, manual command, or when the trend buffers become full. All trend data shall be available in disk file form for use in 3rd Party personal computer applications. 15L-11 93008 (REVISED) Runtime Totalization: Standalone DDC panels shall automatically accumulate and store runtime hours for binary input and output points as specified in the Execution portion of this specification. 1. The Totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute or less. 2. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit for Runtime Totalization. Unique, user-specified messages shall be generated when the limit is reached. Analog/Pulse Totalization: Standalone DDC panels shall automatically sample, calculate and store consumption totals on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis for user -selected analog and binary pulse input -type points. 1. Totalization shall provide calculation and storage of accumulations of up to 99,999.9 units (e.g. KWH, gallons, KBTU, tons. etc.). 2. The Totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute or less. 3. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user-specified messages shall be generated when the limit is reached. Event Totalization: Standalone DDC panels shall have the ability to count events such as the number of times a pump or fan system is cycled on and off. Event totalization shall be performed on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis. 1. The Event Totalization feature shall be able to store the records associated with a minimum of 9,999,999 events before reset. 2. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user-specified messages shall be generated when the limit is reached. APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS - HVAC APPLICATIONS: Each Standalone DDC Controller shall be able to extend its performance and capacity through the use of remote Application Specific Controllers (ASCs). Each ASC shall operate as a standalone controller capable of performing its specified control responsibilities independently of other controllers in the network. Each ASC shall be a microprocessor -based, multi -tasking, real-time digital control processor. 15L-12 93008 (REVISED) Each ASC shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system and data bases including: - Control Processes - Energy Management Applications - Operator I/O (Portable Service Terminal) The operator interface to any ASC point data or programs shall be through any network -resident PC workstation, or any PC or portable operator's terminal connected to any DDC panel in the network. Application Specific Controllers shall directly support the temporary use of a portable service terminal. The capabilities of the portable service terminal shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Display temperatures 2. Display status 3. Display setpoints 4. Display control parameters 5. Override binary output control 6. Override analog setpoints 7. Modification of gain and offset constants Powerfail Protection: All system setpoints, proportional bands, control algorithms, and any other programmable parameters shall be stored such that a power failure of any duration does not necessitate reprogramming the controller. 1. AHU Controllers a. AHU Controllers shall support, but not be limited to, the following configurations of systems to address current requirements as described in the Execution portion of this specification, and for future expansion: - Large Air Handling Units Mixed Air -Single Path Mixed Air -Dual Path 100% Single Path 100% Dual Path b. AHU Controllers shall support all the necessary point inputs and outputs to perform the specified control sequences in a totally standalone fashion. c. AHU controllers shall have a library of control routines and program logic to perform the sequence of operation as specified in the Execution portion of this specification. d. Occupancy -Based Standby/Comfort Mode Control: Each AHU Controller shall have a provision for occupancy sensing 15L-13 (REVISED) 93008 overrides. Based upon the contact status of either a manual wall switch or an occupancy sensing device, the AHU Controller shall automatically select either Standby or ' Comfort mode to minimize the heating and cooling requirements while satisfying comfort conditions. e. Continuous Zone Temperature Histories: Each AHU Controller shall automatically and continuously, maintain a history of the associated zone temperature to allow users to quickly analyze space comfort and equipment performance for the past 24 hours. A minimum of two samples per hour shall be stored. f. Alarm Management: Each AHU Controller shall perform its own limit and status monitoring and analysis to maximize network performance by reducing unnecessary communications. APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS - LIGHTING APPLICATIONS: Each Standalone DDC Controller shall be able to extend its performance and capacity through the use of remote Application Specific Controllers (ASCs) dedicated to controlling lighting. Lighting Control ASCs shall provide standalone remote control of building lighting circuits, including weekly and holiday time programming, local overrides, and local status indication. Each Lighting Control ASC shall operate as a standalone controller capable of performing its specified control responsibilities independently of other controllers in the network. Each Lighting Control ASC shall be a microprocessor -based, multi -tasking, real-time digital control processor. Each Lighting Control ASC shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system and databases, including: - Weekly Scheduling - Energy Management Applications - Local Overrides Occupancy -used Lighting Control: Each lighting circuit shall have an associated binary override input for monitoring motion detectors, wall switches, photocells, or similar devices. Based upon the contact status of an occupancy sensing device, the AHU Controller shall automatically override normal scheduled control to reduce electricity consumption, while satisfying occupant lighting requirements. The operator interface to any Lighting Control ASC point data or programs shall be through any network resident PC workstation, or any PC or portable operator's terminal connected any DDC panel in the network. r� 93008 I I 15L-14 (REVISED) OPERATOR INTERFACE: Basic Interface Description: 1. Command Entry/Menu Selection Process: Operator Workstation interface software shall minimize operator training through the use of English language prompting, English language point identification, and industry standard PC application software. The operator interface shall minimize the use of a typewriter style keyboard through the use of a mouse or similar pointing device, and "point and click" approach to menu selection. Users shall be able to start and stop equipment or change setpoints from graphical displays through the use of a mouse or similar pointing device. 2. Graphical and Text -Based Displays: At the option of the user, Operator Workstations shall provide consistent graphical or text -based displays of all system point and application data described in this specification. Point identification, engineering units, status indication, and application naming conventions shall be the same at all workstations. 3. Multiple, Concurrent Displays: The Operator Interface shall provide the ability to simultaneously view several different types of system displays in overlapping windows to speed building analysis. For example, the interface shall provide the ability to simultaneously display a graphic depicting an air handling unit, while displaying the trend graph of several associated space temperatures to allow the user to analyze system performance. If the interface is unable to display several different types of displays at the same time, the FMS contractor shall provide at least two operator stations. 4. Password Protection: Multiple -level password access protection shall be provided to allow the user/manager to limit workstation control, display and data base manipulation capabilities as he deems appropriate for each user, based upon an assigned password. a. Passwords shall be exactly the same for all operator devices, including portable or panel -mounted network terminals. Any additions or changes made to password definition shall automatically cause passwords at all DDC panels on a network to be updated and downloaded to minimize the task of maintaining system security. Users shall not be required to update passwords for DDC panels individually. 15L-15 93008 (REVISED) b. A minimum of five levels of access shall be supported: - Level 1 = Data Access and Display - Level 2 = Level 1 + Operator overrides - Level 3 = Level 2 -F Database Modification - Level 4 = Level 3 + Database Generation - Level 5 = Level 4 + Password Add/Modification C. A minimum of 50 passwords shall be supported at each DDC panel. d. Operators will be able to perform only those commands available for their respective passwords. Menu selections displayed at any operator device, including portable or panel mounted devices, shall be limited to only those items defined for the access level of the password used to log -on. e. User -definable, automatic log -off timers of from 1 to 60 minutes shall be provided to prevent operators from inadvertently leaving devices on-line, 5. Operator Commands: The operator interface shall allow the operator to perform commands including, but not limited to, the following: a. Start-up or shutdown selected equipment b. Adjust setpoints c. Add/Modify/Delete time programming d. Enable/Disable process execution e. Lock/Unlock alarm reporting for each point f. Enable/Disable Totalization for each point g. Enable/Disable Trending for each point h. Override PID Loop setpoints i. Enter temporary override schedules j. Define Holiday Schedules k. Change time/date I. Enter/Modify analog alarm limits m. Enter/Modify analog warning limits n. View limits o. Enable/Disable Demand Limiting for each meter p. Enable/Disable Duty Cycle for each load 6. Logs and Summaries: Reports shall be generated automatically or manually, and directed to either CRT displays, printers, or disk files. As a minimum, the system shall allow the user to easily obtain the following types of reports: a. A general listing of all points in the network b. List all points currently in alarm c. List of all off-line points d. List all points currently in override status 15L-16 93008 (REVISED) Summaries shall be provided for specific points, fo point group, for a user -selected group of groups, entire facility without restriction due to th configuration of the facility management system. conditions shall the operator need to specify the hardware controller to obtain system information. r a logical or for the e hardware Under no address of Dynamic Color Graphic Displays: Color graphic floor plan displays, and system schematics for each piece of mechanical equipment, including air handling units, chilled water systems, and hot water boiler systems, shall be provided as specified in the Execution portion of this specification to optimize system performance analysis and speed alarm recognition. 1. System Selection/Penetration: The operator interface shall allow users to access the various system schematics and floor plans via a graphical penetration scheme, menu selection, or text -based commands. 2. Dynamic Data Displays: Dynamic temperature values, humidity values, flow values, and status indication shall be shown in their actual respective locations, and shall automatically update to represent current conditions without operator intervention. 3. Windowing: The windowing environment of the PC Operator Workstation shall allow the user to simultaneously view several graphics at the same time to analyze total building operation, or to allow the display of a graphic associated with an alarm to be viewed without interrupting work in progress. 4. Graphics Definition Package: Graphic generation software shall be provided to allow the user to add, modify, or delete system graphic displays. a. The FMS contractor shall provide libraries of pre-engineered screens and symbols depicting standard air handling unit components (e.g. fans, cooling coils, filters, dampers, etc.), complete mechanical systems (e.g. constant volume -terminal reheat, VAV, etc.) and electrical symbols. 93008 15L-17 (REVISED) e. List of all disabled points f. List all points currently locked out g. List of all items defined in a "Follow -Up" file h. List all Weekly Schedules i. List all Holiday Programming' j. List of Limits and Deadbands Summaries shall be provided for specific points, fo point group, for a user -selected group of groups, entire facility without restriction due to th configuration of the facility management system. conditions shall the operator need to specify the hardware controller to obtain system information. r a logical or for the e hardware Under no address of Dynamic Color Graphic Displays: Color graphic floor plan displays, and system schematics for each piece of mechanical equipment, including air handling units, chilled water systems, and hot water boiler systems, shall be provided as specified in the Execution portion of this specification to optimize system performance analysis and speed alarm recognition. 1. System Selection/Penetration: The operator interface shall allow users to access the various system schematics and floor plans via a graphical penetration scheme, menu selection, or text -based commands. 2. Dynamic Data Displays: Dynamic temperature values, humidity values, flow values, and status indication shall be shown in their actual respective locations, and shall automatically update to represent current conditions without operator intervention. 3. Windowing: The windowing environment of the PC Operator Workstation shall allow the user to simultaneously view several graphics at the same time to analyze total building operation, or to allow the display of a graphic associated with an alarm to be viewed without interrupting work in progress. 4. Graphics Definition Package: Graphic generation software shall be provided to allow the user to add, modify, or delete system graphic displays. a. The FMS contractor shall provide libraries of pre-engineered screens and symbols depicting standard air handling unit components (e.g. fans, cooling coils, filters, dampers, etc.), complete mechanical systems (e.g. constant volume -terminal reheat, VAV, etc.) and electrical symbols. 93008 15L-17 (REVISED) b. The graphic development package shall use a mouse or similar pointing device in conjunction with a drawing program to allow the user to perform the following: - Define symbols - Position and size symbols - Define background screens - Define connecting lines and curves Locate, orient and size descriptive text - Define and display colors for all elements - Establish correlation between symbols or text and associated system points or other displays. ' C. Graphical displays can be created to represent any logical grouping of system points or calculated data based upon building function, mechanical system, building layout, or any other logical grouping of points which aids the operator in the analysis of the facility. To accomplish this, the user shall be able to build graphic displays that include point data from multiple DDC panels, including application specific controllers used for DDC unitary or VAV terminal unit control. System Configuration and Definition: All temperature and equipment control strategies and energy management routines shall be definable by the operator. System definition and modification procedures shall not interfere with normal system operation and control. 1. The system shall be provided complete with all equipment and documentation necessary to allow an operator to independently perform the following functions: a. Add/Delete/Modify Standalone DDC Panels b. Add/Delete/Modify Operator Workstations C. Add/Delete/Modify Application Specific Controllers d. Add/Delete/Modify points of any type, and all associated point parameters, and tuning constants e. Add/Delete/Modify alarm reporting definition for each point f. Add/Delete/Modify control loops g. Add/Delete/Modify energy management applications h. Add/Delete/Modify time- and calendar -based programming i. Add/Delete/Modify Totalization for every point j. Add/Delete/Modify Historical Data Trending for every point k. Add/Delete/Modify custom control processes 1. Add/Delete/Modify any and all graphic displays, symbols, and cross-references to point data m. Add/Delete/Modify dial-up telecommunication definition n. Add/Delete/Modify all operator passwords o. Add/Delete/Modify Alarm Messages 15L-18 93008 (REVISED) 2. Programming Description: Definition of operator device characteristics, DDC panels, individual points, applications and control sequences shall be performed through fill -in -the -blank templates and graphical programming approach. Graphical programming shall allow the user to define the software configuration of DDC control logic for HVAC system control sequences, fan interlocks, pump interlocks, PTD control loops, and other control relationships through the creation of graphical logic flow diagrams. a. Graphical Programming: Control sequences are created by using a mouse input device to draw interconnecting lines between symbols depicting inputs, operators (comparisons and mathematical calculations), and outputs of a control sequence. As a minimum, graphic symbols shall be used to represent: - Process Inputs, such as temperature, humidity, or pressure values, status, time, date, or any other measured or calculated system data. - Mathematical Process Operators, such as addition, subtraction, multiplication, or greater than, equal to, less than, etc. - Logical Process Operators such as AND, OR, Exclusive OR, NOT, etc. - Time Delays - Process Control Outputs such start/stop control points, analog adjust points, etc. - Process Calculation Outputs - Text file Outputs and Advisories b. Network -Wide Strategy Development: Inputs and outputs for any process shall not be restricted to a single DDC panel, but shall be able to include data from any and all other DDC panels to allow the development of network -wide control strategies. Processes shall also allow the operator to use the results of one process as the input to any number of other processes (cascading). c. Sequence Testing and Simulation: A software tool shall be provided, which allows a user to simulate control sequence execution to test strategies before they are actually applied to mechanical systems. Users shall be able to enter hypothetical input data, and verify desired control response and calculation results via graphical displays and hardcopy printouts. 3. System Definition/Control Sequence Documentation: All portions of system definition shall be self -documenting to provide hardcopy printouts of all configuration and 15L-19 93008 (REVISED) application data. Control process and DDC control loop documentation shall be provided in logical, graphical flow diagram format to allow control sequences to be easily interpreted and modified, at anytime in the future. 4. Database Save/Restore/Back-Up: Back-up copies of all standalone DDC panel databases shall be stored in at least one personal computer operator workstation. Continuous supervision of the integrity of all DDC panel data bases shall be provided. In the event that any DDC panel on the network experiences a loss of its data base for any reason, the system shall automatically download a new copy of the respective data base to restore proper operation. Data base back--up/Download shall occur over the local area network without operator intervention. Users shall also have the ability to manually execute downloads of any or all portions ' of a DDC panels data base. Personal Computer Operator Workstation Description: Personal ' Computer Operator Workstations shall be provided for command entry, information management, network alarm management, and database management functions. All real-time control functions shall be ' resident in the Standalone DDC panels to facilitate greater fault tolerance and reliability. 1. Workstations will be provided by the City of Lubbock. Standalone DDC panel Local or Portable Operator's Terminals: Each DDC panel shall be capable of supporting an operator's terminal for local command entry, instantaneous and historical data display, and program additions and modifications. 1. There shall be a provision for both permanently mounting the standalone DDC panel Operator Terminal, or using it as a portable handheld unit. 2. The DDC panel Operator Terminal shall simultaneously display a minimum of 6 points with full English identification to allow an operator to view single screen dynamic displays depicting entire mechanical systems. 3. The operator functions provided by the DDC panel operator Terminal shall include, but not be limited to, the following: Start and Stop Points .. Modify Setpoints Modify PID Loop Setpoints Override PID Control Change Time/Date Add/Modify Start/Stop Weekly Scheduling Add/Modify Setpoint Weekly Scheduling 1.5L-20 93008 (REVISED) Enter Temporary Override Schedules - Define Holiday Schedules View Analog Limits Enter/Modify Analog warning Limits Enter/Modify Analog Alarm Limits Enter/Modify Analog Differentials View Point History Files 4. The DDC panel Operator Terminal shall provide access to all real or calculated points in the controller to which it is connected, or any other controller in the network. This capability shall not be restricted to a subset of predefined "global points", but shall provide totally open exchange of data between the operator terminal and any DDC panel in the network. 5. Operator access at all DDC panel Operator Terminals shall be identical to each other, as well as identical to the PC or Laptop Operator workstations. Any password changes shall automatically be downloaded to all controllers on the network. 6. The DDC panel operator terminal shall provide English language prompting to eliminate the need for the user to remember command formats or point names. Prompting shall be provided consistent with a user's password clearance and the types of points being displayed, to eliminate the possibility of operator error. 7. A multi -function touchpad shall be provided for point and command selection, as well as parameter entry. To minimize the possibility of operator error, the DDC panel Operator Terminal shall change and limit touchpad functions based upon an operator's password clearance, the function being performed, and types of points being displayed. Screen displays shall clearly indicate only valid touchpad functions. 8. Context -Sensitive Help: On-line, interactive user's "Help" manuals and tutorials shall be provided. Based upon operator request, the "help" function shall provide general system operating instructions, and specific descriptions of commands available in the currently displayed menus. 9. Identification for all real or calculated points shall be consistent for all network devices. The same English language names used at PC workstations shall be used to access points at the DDC panel Operator's Terminal to eliminate cross-reference or look -up tables. 10. In addition to instantaneous summaries, the DDC panel Operator's Terminal shall allow a user to view a Point History file for system points. Point History files shall provide a record of value of analog points over the last 24 hours, at 15L-21 93008 (REVISED) 30 -minute intervals, or a record of the last ten status changes for binary type. TEMPERATURE SENSORS: Temperature sensing elements shall be capable of sensing temperatures +/- .2°F with repeatability +/- 1% between 50°F and 80°F. USE MAMAC TE -2112 TRANSDUCER OR APPROVED EQUAL. Sensing elements shall be platinum electronic resistance type with. stainless steel probe. 24 Volt AC with 4-20 MA output. For piping furnish appropriate length temperature sensing bulbs for remote DDC control. DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSORS: Install sensitive differential pressure sensors on plate heat exchanger and on each new pump, for proving required minimum flow rate. Heat exchanger sensors shall be sensitive to ± .1" WC and equal to Orange Research manufacture. Differential pressure switches on pumps shall be sensitive to ±1' WG and equal to ASCO or Orange Research manufacture. THERMOSTATS• All existing space thermostats for propeller unit heaters not on DDC control may be reused if they are operational. New space thermostats for concourse shall be gradual acting type, except in cases specified herein to the contrary. All shall be adjustable as to set point and shall be guaranteed to control to plus or minus 1 degree F. of set point. They shall be electronic resistance type. For installation in finished areas furnish in plain case with concealed adjustments. SAFETY LOW LIMIT: Safety low limits shall be manual reset line voltage type with bellows actuated switches. Twenty foot capillary shall be responsive to the coolest section of its length. CONTROL VALVES, WATER: All modulating straight -through water valves shall be provided with equal -percentage contoured throttling plugs. All three-way valves shall be provided with linear throttling plugs such that the total flow through the valve shall remain constant regardless of the valve's position. 15L-22 93008 (REVISED) Valves 3" and smaller shall be screwed type, valves 4" and larger shall be flanged. Valves shall be factory -rated to withstand the pressures encountered. Valves shall have stainless-steel stems and spring-loaded teflon packing. Water valves shall be sized for a pressure drop equal to the coil they serve but not to exceed 5 psi. Valves shall have replaceable seats and discs. All new proportional control dampers shall be opposed or parallel blade type and two -position dampers shall be parallel -blade types. All new dampers shall be minimum leakage type to conserve energy and the manufacturer shall submit leakage and flow characteristic data for all control dampers with the temperature control submitted. Maximum leakage shall be 3% at static pressure of 3 inches of W.C. Control dampers shall be standard products of temperature control manufacturer. Local fabrication of dampers is not allowed. PNEUMATIC ACTUATORS: Pneumatic operators shall be sized to operate their appropriate remote control valves with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two -position action as required. Where sequencing of actuators is called for such sequencing shall be accomplished by spring ranges adequate for the application. 15L-23 93008 (REVISED) CONTROL VALVES STEAM: Steam valves shall be high quality valves equipped with characterized throttling plugs to insure practically straight line gradual operation. Valves shall have stainless steel trim. Where coil loads exceed the capacity of a single 2" valve, two or ' more valves in parallel shall be used. In parallel arrangement, the smaller valve shall open first, with the larger valve beginning to open as the smaller valve reaches its full open position. AIR FLOW CONTROL DAMPERS: All new control dampers shall be types required by their service. Frames shall not be less than 13 gauge galvanized steel. Blades ' must not be over 8 inches wide nor less than .16 gauge galvanized steel roll formed. Bearings shall be oilite, ball bearing or nylon with 1/2" shafts. Side seals shall be stainless steel of the tight -seal spring type. Dampers and seals shall be suitable for temperature ranges of -400to 200°F. All new proportional control dampers shall be opposed or parallel blade type and two -position dampers shall be parallel -blade types. All new dampers shall be minimum leakage type to conserve energy and the manufacturer shall submit leakage and flow characteristic data for all control dampers with the temperature control submitted. Maximum leakage shall be 3% at static pressure of 3 inches of W.C. Control dampers shall be standard products of temperature control manufacturer. Local fabrication of dampers is not allowed. PNEUMATIC ACTUATORS: Pneumatic operators shall be sized to operate their appropriate remote control valves with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two -position action as required. Where sequencing of actuators is called for such sequencing shall be accomplished by spring ranges adequate for the application. 15L-23 93008 (REVISED) FLOW MEASURING DEVICES: Provide and install at the location indicated on the drawings primary flow sensors. Sensors shal'1 be Annubar Type FLO-TAP DMT instrument as manufactured by Dieterich Standard Corporation. ' Sensor shall be 316SS and shall be selected for the particular application specified. Each device shall be complete with mounting coupling, mounting hardware, valves and instrument connections. Instruments shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Accuracy of the instrument shall be within 1% of flow with 0.1% repeatability. Provide a permanent metal identification tag attached to each instrument. Nameplates shall indicate design GPM flow rate. Provide one wall mount Eagle Eye model EFW flow meter in the tunnel, including tubing, a complete set of direct reading scales, filter, and heat seal valve. Meter shall be 6" scale with dampener, bleed valves, zero adjustment, and equalizing valves. All wetted parts shall be stainless steel. Accuracy of the meter shall be 1.5% of flow. Provide and install a DART Flow Computer as manufactured by Dietrich Standard Corporation. It shall receive input from the flow meter and transmit identical scaled 4 to 20 MA signals to a remote digital flow (GPM) display in the Control Panel in Texas ' Tech University CHACP #1 and to the DDC system in the City of Lubbock Coliseum Operating Engineer's Office. The Flow Computer shall also receive input from temperature sensors in the chilled water supply and return piping and transmit identical scaled 4-20 bi mA signals to a remote digital temperature (deg. F) display in CHACP #1 and to the DDC system in the Coliseum. Refer to Dwg. MA1. Additionally, provide a microprocessor and display in CHACP#1 showing instantaneous tons of refrigeration, calculated based on sensor inputs. Provide contacts for future connection to the CHACP #1 DDC system so that the 4-20ma signals for flow, CHS temperature, and CHR temperature may become analog inputs to the CHACP #1 DDC system in the future. It shall be the responsibility of the Temperature Control Subcontractor to provide and install the flow measuring device, the flow meter, all interconnections to new and existing DDC systems so ' the finished system is completely connected, integrated, and operational. 15L-24 93008 (REVISED) SPECIFIC BAS SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS: (City of Lubbock Coliseum) Each air unit, pump and exhaust fan will be controlled through HOA switches from the Motor Control Center. In the AUTO position, these units shall be capable of remote START/STOP from the Building Automation System (BAS). Locate a data terminal in the Operating Engineer's Office for connection to a PC with modem and printer furnished by the City of Lubbock. The PC will control the BAS and temperature regulation systems. The following functions shall be provided to the terminal: ■ 2. Texas Tech University Chilled Water Plant: When either or both access valves on chilled water supply are activated ON by Texas Tech in CHACP #1 time clock or switches, start the corresponding chilled water pump(s). LEAD air units in the Coliseum shall be ON through an electrical interlock, when any chilled water pump is activated. All other air units will be ON with their two position flow control valves OPEN when activated by time schedule as programmed in the BAS system. 1. Auditorium Chilled Water Plant: The existing condensing water the following items of equipment by software interlock such pump, chilled water pump, cooling tower fan, and compressors that shall be capable of START/STOP and by activating two position valves to divert the chilled water from the Auditorium air ■ units to the Coliseum air units. Four "LEAD" air units, located on quarter points in the Coliseum 1. shall be ON through an electrical interlock, when any chilled water pump is li activated. These units do not have flow control valves. All 3. other air units will be ON with their two position flow control valves OPEN when activated by time clock on separate 3 South Air Units channels as desired or needed. 2. Texas Tech University Chilled Water Plant: When either or both access valves on chilled water supply are activated ON by Texas Tech in CHACP #1 time clock or switches, start the corresponding chilled water pump(s). LEAD air units in the Coliseum shall be ON through an electrical interlock, when any chilled water pump is activated. All other air units will be ON with their two position flow control valves OPEN when activated by time schedule as programmed in the BAS system. The system shall include run status for each fan and each chilled water pump to indicate operation. The system shall include control of the SMOKE PURGE system. The system shal Water Flow in Chilled Water R ■ MA signals from 93008 6- 1 contain instantaneous digital display of Chilled GPM and of Chilled Water Supply Temperature and eturn Temperature. The system will receive 4 to 20 the flow instrument in the Texas Tech University 15L-25 (REVISED) Group the following items of equipment by software interlock such that each group of equipment may be enabled by scheduled start/stop from the BAS. ' 1. 5 East Air Units 2. 5 West Air Units 3. 3 North Air Units 4. 3 South Air Units ' 5. 4 Concourse Air Units The system shall include run status for each fan and each chilled water pump to indicate operation. The system shall include control of the SMOKE PURGE system. The system shal Water Flow in Chilled Water R ■ MA signals from 93008 6- 1 contain instantaneous digital display of Chilled GPM and of Chilled Water Supply Temperature and eturn Temperature. The system will receive 4 to 20 the flow instrument in the Texas Tech University 15L-25 (REVISED) chilled water piping flow and temperature instruments. The system shall, based on the inputs, calculate tons of refrigeration and display this valve. The system shall record the times during which the valves V1 and V2 are enabled by Texas Tech. CONTROL CENTER CHACP #1: (Texas Tech University) Provide and install a control panel constructed of 14 gage stainless steel, where directed by the superintendent of Central Plants. The control panel shall have a locking hinged cover and contain the following: valve switch labeled 600 GPM, valve switch labeled 1200 GPM, and one 2 channel, 30 day programmable time clock to control each valve separately. The switches shall be capable of overriding the scheduled timed program and remotely enabling the chilled water valves in Vault #1. When ON by it's time clock, each valve shall be capable of modulation by the Coliseum BAS system to maintain CHR setpoint. LED digital display of flow by 4 to 20 MA signals from the flow meter in the chilled water supply line shall be indicated on the panel at all times. When OFF by its time clock or corresponding switch, each valve shall be disabled and close completely. LED digital temperature indication from sensors in the chilled water supply and chilled water return piping to the Coliseum shall be displayed on the panel at all times by 4 to 20 MA signals from temperature sensors in the lines. In addition, provide a microprocessor or which will receive 4-20mA signal from the temperature sensors and flow rate from the flow meter. The microprocessor shall convert these signals to a tons refrigeration scaled 4-20mA output for LED display on the control panel. Display tons of refrigeration on the panel at all times. Provide minute counters in the 0-10V Dc output from CHACP #1 to the Coliseum DDC system for the purpose of logging time for each valve. The counters shall advance in increments of one minute at all times that the respective chilled water valve is enabled, regardless of whether it was enabled by the time clock, or the panel switch, or a future remote source. Refer to drawing MA1. TEMPERATURE CONTROL OF CHILLED WATER AT ACCESS TO TTU UTILITY: The modulating valves V1 and V2 installed in the VAULT shall be enabled to operate by the CHACP#1 control panel via 0-10V Dc signal. Any time the CHACP#1 system has enabled valves #1 and #2, the DDC system in the Coliseum shall modulate valves #1 and #2 in sequence to maintain a setpoint of 55 deg. F. (adjustable) chilled water return temperature. PART III - EXECUTION ELECTRICAL INTERLOCKS: All electrical interlocks shall be provided as specified. 15L-26 93008 (REVISED) All electrical interlocks shall be made by means of motor starters or shall be accomplished by separate relays. No motor power lead shall be utilized in an interlock circuit. All interlocked starters with disconnect switches shall be provided with auxiliary contacts on the disconnect switch so that interlocking circuits are interrupted when the disconnect switch in thrown to the OFF position. This contractor shall submit wiring diagrams for his equipment which when approved will become installation drawings. These diagrams shall show all interlock circuits and shall relate such diagrams of internal wiring of equipment items as are furnished by the manufacturers of that equipment of the system ac A Lu' -i - SEQUENCE OF OPERATION: Coliseum Air Units: All 20 air units shall have outside air and return air dampers. When an air unit is ON, the outside air dampers shall be closed and the return air dampers shall be open unless a ventilation cycle is activated by outside air temperature, indoor air quality, or smoke removal. When an air unit is OFF, the outside air dampers shall be closed. Outside air and return air dampers for air units ON shall operate in unison for ventilation cycles. LEAD air units (4) shall be provided with an outside air temperature sensor located at the outside air louver, a return air sensor located at the return air inlet and a mixed air temperature sensor. When outside air temperature is below 500F., the system shall bypass the plate heat exchanger to the Texas Tech University chilled water system and activate the converter and heating/cooling 3 -way changeover valve for heating. The outside air dampers on all activated air units shall modulate in unison to maintain the return air temperature at 750F., (adjustable). This sequence of control shall be overriden by either the minimum ventilation requirements, or smoke purge requirements, when the outside air dampers reach the minimum ventilation value set for indoor air quality or when the outside air dampers are set at maximum for smoke removal. When the outside air temperature is above 600F., deactivate the converter and heating/cooling 3 -way changeover valve for heating and activate the plate heat exchanger to the Texas Tech University chilled water system or the Auditorium chilled water system for cooling. The temperature from any combination of sensors at the LEAD air units shall be used to control the three-way valve ahead of the chilled water pumps to maintain the return air temperature at 75°F. (adjustable). Indoor air quality shall be controlled by ventilation through six steps of exhaust fan operation. The BAS system shall index the outside air intakes at all enabled AHUs in six steps, interlocked with the six exhaust fans. The six steps shall be designated by Coliseum occupants. 1500 PEO, 3000 PEO, 4500 PEO, 6000 PEO, 7500 PEO, 9000 PEO. A carbon dioxide sensor shall be provided and installed on the light bridge. The level of ventilation shall be controlled automatically by the BAS system 15L-27 93008 (REVISED) operator interface terminal. Should a pyrotechnic display cause smoke or engine exhaust cause smoke or fumes, emergency SMOKE PURGE sequence will activate all exhaust fans to ON and OPEN all outside air dampers to maximum and bypass all smoke detector functions for fan OFF switches. This sm ke purcle sequence is manual and is initiated by keyed switch at the fire alarm panel. Refer to 16I-5 for sequence of control for SMOKE PURGE. All air units shall have smoke detectors to meet NFPA requirements so that any detector sensing smoke will shut OFF all air units. A dust switch shall be provided which will close all outside air dampers. Provide operators for valves 6, 7, 10 and 12 as shown on Sheet M-9 to be controlled by the DDC system, so that precooling of the Coliseum from the auditorium chillers will be automated. TEMPERATURE CONTROL OF COLISEUM:. By control of leaving chilled water temperature, the air leaving the Coliseum air units will be approximately at the apparatus dew point of the design conditions. Control of comfort conditions for both heating and cooling, will be through a three-way valve in the hot/chilled water piping ahead of the hot/chilled water pumps and the two position 3 -way changeover valve. COLISEUM AIR CONDITIONING: When Coliseum operator desires to cool the Coliseum, he may either access the Texas Tech University chilled water system by requesting chilled water from CHACP #1 or start the Auditorium chilled water system. Both systems shall not be operated simultaneously. Exhaust fans shall be divided into 6 separate steps. Software interlock the following equipment together for operation by time sequence or by manual operator initiation: u 1 1 Each of the groups shall be controlled on a separate time schedule. For example: Groups 1 and 2 can be ON with the Auditorium chillers to precool the Coliseum prior to a function requiring Texas Tech University chilled water for an evening function. The concourse could be ON when the TTU chilled water is available. Exhaust would be required until the people are seated and the event begins. One unit each on north, east, south and west are LEAD air units, interlocked with hot/chilled water pumps. Another example: Groups 1 through 4 could be operated with CHACP #1 on Valve #1 (600 GPI) for rapid precooling and/or a low I. Six air units on east side. 2. Six air units on west side. 3. Four air units on north side. 4. Four air units on south side. 5. Four air units on concourse. u 1 1 Each of the groups shall be controlled on a separate time schedule. For example: Groups 1 and 2 can be ON with the Auditorium chillers to precool the Coliseum prior to a function requiring Texas Tech University chilled water for an evening function. The concourse could be ON when the TTU chilled water is available. Exhaust would be required until the people are seated and the event begins. One unit each on north, east, south and west are LEAD air units, interlocked with hot/chilled water pumps. Another example: Groups 1 through 4 could be operated with CHACP #1 on Valve #1 (600 GPI) for rapid precooling and/or a low 15L-28 (REVISED) 93008 15L-28 (REVISED) attendance function. As the audience arrives Valve #2 (1200 GPM) could be added to handle the maximum load. Each air unit and exhaust fan shall be provided HANDJOFF/AUTO switch regardless of whether the equipment is new or existing. Coordinate with Division 15 contractors prior to Bid! In the HAND position, the unit will be ON. In the OFF position, the unit will be OFF. In the AUTO position, the unit will be under the control of the BAS system. CONVERTER• There shall be an outside master thermostat with its sensitive element outdoors but protected from the sun, and a submaster thermostat with its sensitive element in the water circulating line. There shall be an automatic steam valve on the steam supply. When a hot water circulating pump is running, the master thermostat shall reset the control point of the submaster thermostat to control, by means of modulating the steam valve, the temperature of the water delivered by the pump in accordance with a fixed schedule. This schedule shall be a straight line relationship at a fixed ratio between outside temperature and water temperature drawn through the point of 0 degrees outside temperature and 180 degrees water temperature, and 70 degrees outside temperature and 70 degrees water temperature. AIR UNITS; Except for the four LEAD units, each unit shall have a hot/chilled water coil with 2 -way valve control. It will open when fan is ON. Dampers in the outside air inlet and the return air inlet to the unit shall be open return air when the unit is running and closed when the unit is off. 1 15L-29 93008 (REVISED) Temperature sensors shall be provided for monitoring by the operator. The units serving the Coliseum proper can be ON or OFF to suit the area where the audience is seated. Carbon dioxide sensor shall provide input to the BAS for automated control of exhaust fans or for monitoring by the operator. Outside air dampers must be activated with their respective air unit, but remain closed until the ventilation switch is increased. The ventilation switch will operate all of the outside air dampers in unison on air units in operation. The ventilation switch will have six steps based upon 1500, 3000, 4500, 6000, 7500 and 9000 occupants to open position of all outside air dampers. To maintain a positive air pressure in the Coliseum the exhaust fans must be operated in six steps with the dampers until all outside air dampers are 100% open before all exhaust fans are ON. Coordinate proper sequencing with TAB subcontractor. CONVERTER• There shall be an outside master thermostat with its sensitive element outdoors but protected from the sun, and a submaster thermostat with its sensitive element in the water circulating line. There shall be an automatic steam valve on the steam supply. When a hot water circulating pump is running, the master thermostat shall reset the control point of the submaster thermostat to control, by means of modulating the steam valve, the temperature of the water delivered by the pump in accordance with a fixed schedule. This schedule shall be a straight line relationship at a fixed ratio between outside temperature and water temperature drawn through the point of 0 degrees outside temperature and 180 degrees water temperature, and 70 degrees outside temperature and 70 degrees water temperature. AIR UNITS; Except for the four LEAD units, each unit shall have a hot/chilled water coil with 2 -way valve control. It will open when fan is ON. Dampers in the outside air inlet and the return air inlet to the unit shall be open return air when the unit is running and closed when the unit is off. 1 15L-29 93008 (REVISED) The outside damper will be under control of the ventilation switch when unit is ON. The return damper will be linked to the outside air damper. Freezestat required on all air units with outside air supply. Stop the unit and close the outside air damper any time the EAT to the coil is below 40 deg. F. with manual reset - unless smoke purge sequence is controlling the units. Smoke Detector: Refer to Division 16. i� � I � I I I I I I I I I I I 93008 I I END OF SECTION ISL -30 (REVISED) No Text No Text CHACP_il CONTROL PANEL CHS TEMP. 'F7 rCHR TEMP. OF LED READOUTS {TYPICAL} GPM FLOW TONS OF REFRIGERATION T I MECLOCK OVERRIDE SWITCHES- , A4.1a[4Y ENABLE VALVES AI . _t, -HS .i tmP. -r .-J SEt- JDC ITRI,- M - 'r Al: CHR TEMP. OF SYSTEM Al: GPM FLOW 4-20MA ANALOG OUTPUTS 81: VALVE 1ENABLE INPUTS FLOW METER/COMPUTER 81: VALVE 2 ENABLE WITH LOCAL READOUT OF TEMP. do FLOW TO COLISEUM MICROPROCESSOR TON CALCULATOR —/4-20MA SCALED V 1 V�2 r=---LSIGNALS s CONTACTS FOR FUTURE CONNECTION TO ANALOG INPUT POINTS IN CHACP #1 DDC SYSTEM mkcp #t "- FUTURE ANALOG OUTPUT POINTS FROM CHACP #1 /-POINTS SYSTEM 4-20MA . SIGNALS 0-i0Y DC L,O-10V DC SIGNAL - 2 CONDUCTOR SIGNAL SHIELDED WIRE MINUTE COUNTER NO RESET FUNCTION 2 -CHANNEL DIGITAL TIME CLOCK 30 DAY PROGRAMMABLE - CAPABLE OF ENABLING VALVE ;i1 & #2 INDEPENDENTLY OR TOGETHER UTILITY VALVE CONTROL & MONITORING DIAGRAM v l A A �l A.A m r EXIST. CDUNTER -- BRING CONDUITS U IN THIS OFFICE - MODIFY COUNTER AS NECESSARY ■ NEW SWITCHBOARD "MS02" 1 � f .=EXIST. BOILER EXIST. 001 LER EXIST. 001LER TRANSF. VAUL SERVICE R M LPL TRANSFORMER LOCATE S ITCHBAORD & CONDUITS TO MAIN! IN THIS AREA CLEAR FOR EQUI ENT ACCESS TO AREAWAY FEEDER TO MOTOR CON CENTER AREAWA L RUN CONDUITS UP THRU STAGE MANAGER'S OFFICE. 08 IN co THSSALL RUNPASREQUIRED J -L-- ff PARTIAL BASEMENT PLAN SCALE. 1/8" = 1'-.D„ City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 70457 BOB -767-21 B7 MAILED TO VENDOR CLOSE DATE: Office of Purchasing April 18, 1995 April 20, 1995 Qa 2:00 P.M. BID #13193 - AIR CONDITIONING FOR LUBBOCK MUNICIPAL COLISEUM ADDENDUM # 4 Please modify or amend Contract Document as per the attached sheet. 4Sheld Senior Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY WITH YOUR BID CITY OF LUBBOCK REQUEST FOR BIDS FOR TITLE: AIR CONDITIONING FOR MUNICIPAL COLISEUM ADDRESS: LUBBOCK, TEXAS BID NUMBER: 13193 PROJECT NUMBER: 9935.9211 CONTRACT PREPARED BY: PURCHASING DEPARTMENT 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. INDEX NOTICE TO BIDDERS GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS BID PROPOSAL - BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS PAYMENT BOND PERFORMANCE BOND CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE CONTRACT GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS SPECIFICATIONS SPECIAL CONDITIONS NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE u 1 NOTICE TO BIDDERS 1 1 1 NOTICE TO BIDDERS BID # 13193 Sealed bids addressed to Ron ShuB"ield, Senior Buyer, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received at the office of the Purchasing Manager, Municipal Bldg., 1625 13th St., Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 2:00 o'clock R.m. on the 15th da of March, 1995, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project: AIR CONDITIONING FOR M INICEPAL COLISEUM After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed bids will be opened by the Buyer at his office and publicly read aloud. It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to insure that his bid is actually in the office of Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, prior to the expiration of the date above first written. The City of Lubbock will consider the bids on the 13th day of April, 1995, at the Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all bids and waive any formalities. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond and payment bond in accordance with Article 5160, Vernon's Ann, Civil St., in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000.00. Said statutory bonds should be issued by a company carrying a current Best Ra_ tiny of B or superior, as the rating of the bond company is a factor that will be considered in determination of the lowest responsible bidder. If the contract price does not exceed $25,000.00 the said statutory bonds will not be required. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a proposal bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him. It shall be each bidders sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding all local conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid submitted. The plans, specifications, proposal forms and contract documents may be examined at the office of the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, Lubbock, Texas. Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diene wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, which document is specifically referred to in this notice to bidders. Each bidder's attention is further directed to provision of Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage scale. t The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in consideration for an award. There will be a pre-bid conference on 8th day of March 1995 at 10:00 o'clock a.m., at the LUBBOCK MUNICIPAL COLISEUM, 4TH STREET AND BOSTON AVENUE, Lubbock, Texas. The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre-bid meetings and bid openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you would like bid information made available in a more accessible format or if you require assistance, please contact the Purchasing Department at (806) 767-2167 (Monday -Friday, 8:00 - 5:00 p.m.) or 1625 13th Street Room L-04 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting. CI OF LUBJ30K RON SHUFF'IEL SENIOR BUYER ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS BID # 13193 Sealed bids addressed to Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer, Purchasing Department, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received at the Purchasing Office, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401 until 2:00 o'clock JO.M. on the 15th day of March 1995 or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project: AIR CONDITIONING FOR THE MUNICIPAL COLISEUM aw After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed bids will be opened in the office of the Buyer and publicly read aloud. The plans, specifications, bid forms and contract documents may be examined at the office of the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, Texas. Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the Schedule of General Prevailing Rate of Per Diem Wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, Texas. Each bidder's attention is further directed to the provisions of Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann, Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning such wage r scales and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by the City of Lubbock. The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to this invitation and will 1 not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in consideration for an award. There will be a prebid conference on the 8th day of March 1995 at 10:00 a.m., at the LUBBOCK MUNICIPAL COLISEUM, 4TH STREET AND BOSTON AVENUE, Lubbock, Texas. The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre-bid meetings and bid openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you would like bid information made available in a more accessible format or if you require assistance, please contact the Purchasing Department at (806) 767-2167 (Monday -Friday, 8:00 - 5:00 p.m.) or 1625 13th Street, Room L-04 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting. 11 11 11 11 LI 1 t 1 i 1 1 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1 1 1 J 4. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SCOPE OF WORK The contractor shall furnish all labor, superintendence, machinery, equipment and all materials necessary to complete this project in accordance with contract documents for the AIR CONDITIONING FOR MUNICIPAL COLISEUM. CONTRACT DOCUNMNTS All work covered by this contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the General Conditions. All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by said contract documents. PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without charge of forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents, may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice to Bidders. TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION The construction covered by the contract documents shall be fully completed within 160 (One Hundred Sixty) consecutive calendar days from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful bidder. The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to insure completion of the project within the time specified. All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the contract documents. G. AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the improvements contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims pending, of which the Contractor has been notified. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for protecting them adequately until incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility of complying with this provision. The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project. 8. GUARANTEES All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against defective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a written general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within ONE year from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock). PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR The contractor will be furnished one set of plans and specifications, and related contract documents for his use during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished directly to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor. 10. PROTECTION OF THE WORK The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials, supplies,. machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City reserves the right, after the bids have been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information: (a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by the proposed contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed. (b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the bidder. (e) Equipment schedule. 11. TEXAS STATE SALES TAX This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act. The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the materials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase. 12. PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will furnish Contractor the location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures cut or damaged by Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, at Contractor's expense. 13. BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and replaced by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of acceptance of the project. 14. EXPLOSIVES The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor from the City. In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all damage which may occur as a direct or indirect result of the blasting. In addition, in all cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use utmost care so as not to endanger life or property and the Contractor shall further use only such methods as are currently utilized by persons, firms, or corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity. Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor. In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this contract, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or below the ground) in proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their property from injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damage resulting from his blasting operations. 15. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the work is in progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the name, address and telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by this contract is in progress. 16. INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation. The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured and shall further state that all subcontractors are named as additional insureds, or in the alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted. 17. LABOR AND WORKING HOURS Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. The wage rate which must be paid on this project shall not be less than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The bidders' attention is further directed to the requirements of Article 5159a, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes providing for the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the bidder's obligations thereunder. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in these contract documents does not release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be applicable. Construction work under this contract requiring an inspector will not be performed on weekends or holidays unless the following conditions exist: (1) The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary service to its citizens. (2) Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent effort to complete the contract within the allotted time. Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on weekends or holidays, the Contractor must notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday he desires to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative to do such work. The final decision on whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on weekends or holidays will be made by the Owner's Representative. In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done under this contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately commence work, regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition so that it is no longer dangerous to property or life. 18. PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without discount, not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors engaged at the site of the work shall not later than the seventh day following the payment of wages, file with the Owner's Representative, or Engineer, a certified, sworn, legible copy of such payroll. This shall contain the name of each employee, his classification, the number of hours worked on each day, rate of pay, and net pay. The affidavit shall state that the copy is a true and correct copy of such payroll, that no rebates or deductions (except as shown) have been made, or will in the future be made from the wages paid as shown thereon. The Contractor must classify employees according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages, which schedule is included in the contract documents. The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf this contract is made, ten dollars for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. 19, PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATOR CLAUSES Proposals submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to increases or decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be rejected and returned to the bidder without being considered. 20. PREPARATION FOR PROPOSAL The bidder shall submit his proposal on forms furnished by the City. All blank spaces in the form shall be correctly filled in and the bidder shall state the price both in words and numerals, for which he proposes to do the work contemplated or furnish the materials required_ Such prices shall be written in ink, distinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the price written in words and the price written in figures, the price written in words shall govern. If the proposal is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly authorized agent. If a proposal is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member must be given and the proposal signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly authorized. If the proposal is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address must be given, and the proposal signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or others to sign proposals must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the proposal. The proposal shall be executed in ink. Each proposal shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, and endorsed on the outside of the envelope in the following manner: (a) Bidder's name (b) Proposal for (description of the project). Bid proposals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time prior to the time set for opening of the bids, but no proposal may be withdrawn or altered thereafter. 21. BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and include the following. (a) Notice to Bidders. (b) General Instructions to Bidders. (c) Bidder's Proposal. (d) Statutory Bond (if required). (e) Contract Agreement. (f) General Conditions. (g) Special Conditions (if any). (h) Specifications. (i) Insurance Certificates. 0) All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents. !J, J a BID PROPOSAL u 1 r BID PROPOSAL LUMP SUM PROPOSAL CONTRACT PLACE: C17X eI` Lv ! pCX DATE: ms PROJECT NUMBER: 13193 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM - LUBBOCK COLISEUM Proposal of % r T 1AIC, (hereinafter called Bidder) To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) Gentlemen: The Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the construction of a & having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related contract documents and the site of the proposed work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the proposed project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents. MATERIALS: Fi 11 f AV iT VI SERVICES: r„ rr9� %/��� — (_.344 4000,00 ) DAC A7 ,//roitif, iYr" i�UN.�Cr S<U�/JI� 7/lrrrfieu�n�✓i>, TOTAL BASE BID: moll— 4n� (ST%3. RE 0 0 ) ALTERNATE #1: Assemble, install and insulate the steam and condensate piping in the City of Lubbock tunnel with a connection to the Texas Tech University Steam System. MATERIALS: Tlvr Iter TlfpVJrgra�,l7iP !`l�ir+f�iP� �!F! 7, %!/N"! ©o ) SERVICES: F-krJfi r v r S (S0 Q TOTAL ALTERNATE #1 (Add): SFlr0Nn, F—[file Nunlor'4FO2r , rru - (s 7 ALTERNATE #2: Install the air conditioning system serving the Coliseum Lower Level Concourse. .� MATERIALS: U 0. D© } SERVICES: Clbff% THOyJ�lyry ! � y NU llr�l� / „(S {1D, OQ ) TOTAL ALTERNATE #2 (Add): , � S X tri 1AIP (s S c u 0 , 00 ) 6,LTERNATE #3: Install the air conditioning system serving the Coliseum Lower Level North Texas Tech Team Locker Rooms. f- IATERIALS: 3IX M',t1 O , U-Mfrf l' N(/Iy I-� r IF712 N 6031 SERVICES: eM TLJ,00;,6-,4-- Yrt P T (S I0 ji 2. 0 0 'OTAL ALTERNATE #3 (Add):,Ei�hf r oUiATo Mr HVlfL�RLrl L2f124 1.12-7 00 ) ALTERNATE #4: Install the air conditioning system serving the Coliseum Lower Level South Visiting Team Locker Rooms. MATERIALS:_ I'fVV 7-tj0J1J JYfi. 9VAAe7-1- SIL%rrY ZA 0 ;ERVICES:-levi ' Q r--4 " ,i? r, ( d a 0 0 i TOTAL ALTERNATE #4 (Add): t:r'a'1 7,919VJ Y/� SrY?hfjr'N/?A,YJ ��Iir�i S`i,Y (� -7,1 Y G . 00 ) Amount shall be shown in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.) Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written "Notice to L ?rocced" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 160 LOne Hundred Siam consecutive calendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of 5100.00 (ONE HUNDRED DOLLAR for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set forth hereinabove for -ompletion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract documents. Bidder understands and agrees that this bid proposal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with instruction number 20 of the General Instructions to Bidders. Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the bidding. The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on which he has bid; as provided in the contract documents. Bidders arc required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a proposal bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5% ) of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him. Enclosed with this proposal is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for Dollars ($ , or a Proposal Bond in the sum of 570 Dollars (5�, which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the proposal is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within ten (10) days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said proposal; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand. ■ �� Aft - Bidder Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. Contracto3 BY: _ (Seal if Bidder is a Corporation) � ST: ;eeretary f lrecc�.e�- I LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS Minority Owned Yes No f I. -Tumm Wile -1c - C B ihorypiem Con, ;aucrj®N 2. FLF-LTRkcva-c. — ROW Wi9I 1 FLFLT12i c- -.3. C()14T(UL� — H0mr-') Uel � 4• IINSUcO-NON1 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10, Minority Owned Yes No f A° (.A. _:ocument No. A-310 (Fcbnm 1970 Fi1.) - Wausau Insurance Companies A Member of the Nateonwide'liGroup KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, Any correspondence in relation to this bond should be directed to: BOND DEPT WAUSAU INSURANCE COMPANIES PO BOX 8017 WAUSAU WI 54402-8017 Bid Bored BRUCE THORNTON AIR CONDITIONING, INC. as Principal, hereinafter called the Principal, and EMPLOYERS INSURANCE OF WAUSAU A Mutual Company, a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Wisconsin as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety are held and firmly bound unto CITY OF LUBBOCK as Obligee, hereinafter called the Obligee, in the sum of FIVE PERCENT OF THE GREATEST AMOUNT BID -----------------Dollars ($------5%-------), for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, the said Principal and the said Surety, bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has submitted a bid for MUNICIPAL COLISEUM AIR CONDITIONING Now, THEREFORE, if the Obligee shall accept the bid of the Principal and the Principal shall enter into a contract with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of such bid, and give such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding or contract documents with good and sufficient surety for the faithful performance of such contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution thereof, or in the event of the failure of the Principal to enter such contract and give such bond or bonds, if the Principal shall pay to the Obligee the difference not to exceed the penalty hereof between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Obligee may in good faith contract with another party to perform the work covered by said bid, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. Signed and sealed this 20TH day of F Witney I\ ! witness SC0023 03-92 APRIL A. D. 19 95 BRUCE THORNTON AIR CONDTTIO?�I 1 INt; Pfinci* F4.,yf 'title EMPLOYERS INSURANCE OF WAUSAU A Mutual Company Surety (Seel) Jf By EVI J. N Attntnoy-Ln-F=EE EMPLOYERS INSURANCE OF WAUSAU A Mutual Company POWER OF ATTORNEY (FOR BID BONDS ONLY) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That the EMPLOYERS INSURANCE OF WAUSAU A Mutual Company, a corporation duly organized and existing under the laws of the State of Wisconsin, and having its principal office in the Cit• of Wausau. County of Marathon. State of Wisconsin, has made, constituted and appointed. and does by these presents make. constitute and appoint KEVIN J. DUNN, HOWARD COWAN, MARLA HILL its true and lawful attorney-in-fact, with full power and authority hereby conferred in its name, place and stead, to execute. t seal, acknowledge and deliver ANY AND ALL BID BONDS OR WRITTEN DOCUMENTS INVOLVING BID GUARAN- TEES OR IN THE NATURE THEREAFTER en&to bind the corporation thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such bonds were signed by the President, sealed with the corporate seal of the corporation and duly attested by its secretary hereby ratifying and confirming all that the said attorney-in-fact may do in the premises. This powerof attorney is granted pursuant to the following resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of said Company at a meeting duly called and held on the 18th day of May, 1973, which resolution is still in effect: "RESOLVED, that the President and any Vice President — elective or appointive — of EMPLOYERS INSURANCE OF WAUSAU A Mutual Company be, and that each of them hereby is, authorized to execute powers of attorney qualifying the attorney named in the given power of attorney to execute on behalf of EMPLOYERS INSURANCE OF WAUSAU A Mutual Company bonds, undertakings and all contracts of suretvship; and that any secretary or assistant secretary be, and that each or any of them hereby is, authorized to attest the execution of any such power of attorney, and to attach thereto the seal of EMPLOYERS INSURANCE OF WAUSAU A Mutual Company:" "FURTHER RESOLVED, that the signatures of such officersand theseal of EMPLOYERS INSURANCE OF WAUSAU A Mutual Company may be affixed to any such power of attorney or to any certificate relating thereto by facsimile. and any such power of attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signatures and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the EMPLOYERS INSURANCE OF WAUSAU A Mutual Company when so affixed and in the future with respect to any bond, undertaking or contract of suretyship to which it is attached" IN WITNESS WHEREOF, EMPLOYERS INSURANCE OF WAUSAU A Mutual Company has caused these presents to be signed by the vice president and attested by its assistant secretary, and its corporate seal to be hereto affixed this IST day of MAY 19_24 EMPLOYERS INSURANCE OF WAUSAU A Mutual Company �41 SEAL it By - J. Stephen Ryan Vice President Attest: R. J. Besteman Assistant Secretary STATE OF WISCONSIN ) )ss. COUNTY OF MARATHON ) On this 1ST day of MAY w94 before me personally came I. Stephen Ryan to me known, who being by me duly sworn, did depose and say that he is a vice president of the EMPLOYERS INSURANCE OF WAUSAU A MutuaiCompany, the corporation described in and which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seal of said corporation: that the seal affixed to said instrument is such corporate seal and that it was so affixed by order of the Board of Directors of said corporation and that he signed his name thereto by like order. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my official seal the day and year herein first above written. 4a Q . Patricia A. Kiernan Notary Public NOTARY PUBLIC STATE OF WISCONSIN"��' MY COMMISSION EXPIRES MAY 29, 1994 _=',.'�• ° STATE OF WISCONSIN ) CERTIFICATE CITY OF WAUSAU ) ss. COUNTY OF MARATHON ) I, the undersigned, assistant secretary of EMPLOYERS INSURANCE OF WAUSAU A Mutual Company, a Wisconsin corporation, do hereby certify that the foregoing and attached power of attorney, WHICH MUST CONTAIN A VALIDAT- ING STATEMENT PRINTED IN THE MARGIN THEREOF IN RED INK, remains in full force and has not been revoked; and furthermore that the resolution of the Board of Directors set forth in the power of attorney is still in force. Signed and sealed in the City of Wausau, Marathon County, State of Wisconsin, this 20TH _ day of APRIL 1995. �.� R. J. Besteman Assistant Secretary NOTE: IF YOU HAVE ANY QUESTIONS REGARDING THE VALIDITY OR WORDING OF THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY, CALL TOLL FREE (800) 826-1661.1IN WISCONSIN, CALL (800) 47.7-0041) 815-4=-1 1092 r 1 1 t 1 11 11 PAYMENT BOND BOND CHECK BEST RATING W SDAT 1 u1nd Xa. /65-D -oti- r31Aa5- STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND PURSUANT TO ARTICLE 5160 OF THE REVISED CIVIL STATUTES OF TEXAS AS AMENDED BY ACTS OF THE 56TH LEGISLATURE, REGULAR SESSION, 1959 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that t&�'4'ka'14v— (hereinafter called the Principal(s), as Principal(s), and {hereinafter called the yrety{s), as Surety(s), are hel and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of "''V)V `t "� "" =-Dollars ($ d3 eL lawful money of the United States for the payment whereof, the said rincipal and Sure bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. 4 WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the day of 19as-, to �ci � ! 3 ��3 - Q,t,�. � - ��t+.�.�.� % ,Y�- r.� [cam-�^• and said Principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at �' length herein. , kw NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Article 5160 of the Revised Civil Statutes of Texas as amended by Acts of the 56th Legislature, Regular Session, 1959, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this Z day of 19i dT S ty Principal By: (Title) By: (Title) By: (Title) The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby designates SOW A -R 0 C!")) 41 Ahi an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service of process maitZ hiiditi matters arising out of such suretyship. Approved as to form: City of Lubbock By: 4441 City Attorney t .E ure * B* (Title) CEVIN J. DUNN ATTY IN FACT * Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files. MR LJ O 0 Z W w Q to F- W Z Z tr O � Q LL O tY W No. 216-185-00013 EMPLOYERS INSURANCE OF WADS 4J A Mutual Company POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That the EMPLOYERS INSURANCE OF WAUSAU A Mutual Company, a corporation duly organized and existing under the laws of the State of Wisconsin, and having its principal office in the City of Wausau, County of Marathon, State of Wisconsin, has made, constituted and appointed and does by thesepresentsmake, constitute and appoint KEVIN J . DURfi, ARD COWAN, MARLA HILL its true and lawful attorney-in-fact, with full power and authority hereby conferred in its name, place and stead, to execute, seal, acknowledge and deliver ANY OR ALL BONDS, UNDERTAKINGS, RECOGNIZANCES OR OTHER WRITTEN OBLIGATIONS IN THE NATURE THEREOF NOT TO EXCEED THE PENAL SUM OF TEN MILLION DOLLARS ($10,000,000) and to hind the corporation thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such bonds were signed by the President, sealed with the corporate seal of the corporation and duly attested by its secretary hereby ratifying and confirming all that the said attorney-in-fact may do in the premises. This powerof attorney is granted pursuant to the following resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of said Company at a meeting duly called and held on the lflth day of May, 1973, which resolution is still in effect: "RESOLVED, that the President and any Vice President — elective or appointive — of EMPLOYERS INSURANCE OF WAUSAU A Mutual Company be, and that each of them hereby is, authorized to execute powers of attorney qualifying the attorney named in the given power of attorney to execute on behalf of EMPLOYERS INSURANCE OF WAUSAU A Mutual Company bonds, undertakings and all contracts of suretyship; and that any secretary or assistant secretary be, and that each or any of them hereby is, authorized to attest the execution of any such power of attorney, and to attach thereto the seal of EMPLOYERS INSURANCE. OF WAUSAU A Mutual Company:' "FU RTH F.R RESOLVED, that the signatures of such officers and the seal of EMPLOYERS INSURANCE OF WAUSAU A Mutual Company may be affixed to any such power of attorney or to any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any such power of attornev or certificate bearing such facsimile signatures and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the EMPLOYERS INSURANCE: OF WAUSAU A Mutual Company when so affixed and in the future with respect to anv bond, undertaking or contract of suretyship to which it is attached" IN WITNESS WHEREOF, EMPLOYERS INSURANCE. OF WAUSAU A Mutual Company has caused these presents to be signed by the ice president and attt� by its assistant secretary, and its corporate seal to be hereto affixed this 1ST day of MA 19 y� EMPLOYERS INSURANCE OF WAUSAU A Mutual Company �IyarSEA By otir� i4 J. Stephen Ryan _�/ Attest: -- R, J. B steman Assistant Secretary STATE. OF WISCONSIN 1 1 ss. COUNTY OF MARATHON ) Vice President On this IST day of MAY ,1994 , before me personally came J. Stephen Ryan , to me known, who being by me duly sworn, did depose and say that he is a vice president of the EMPLOYERS INSURANCE OF WAUSAU A MutualCompany, the corporation described in and which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seal of said corporation; that the seal affi xed to said instrument is such corporate seal and that it was so affixed by order of the Board of Directors of said corporation and that he signed his name thereto by like order. P% WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my official seal the day and year herein first above written Patricia A. Kleman Notary Public NOTARY PUBLIC .} STATE OF WISCONSIN .. STATE; OF WISCONSIN i I' �• �� ° MY COMMISSION EXPIRES MAY 29, 1994 CITY OF WAUSAUi ss. '%•r J.'. {'OI►N'1'Y OF MARATHON I CERTIFICATE 1. the undersigned. assistant secretary of EMPLOYERS INSURANCE OF WAUSAU A Mutual Company, a Wisconsin corporation, do hereby certify that the foregoing and attached power of attorney, WHICH MUST CONTAIN A VALIDATING STATIsMENT PRINTF IJ IN THE MARGIN THEREOF IN REI) INK, remains in full force and has not been revoked; and furthermore that the resolution of the Board of Directors set forth in the pnwerof attorney is still in force. Signed and sealed in the City of Wausau, Marathon County, State of Wisconsin, this of MAY . 19 95 . .� n !:�' 17TH day 41 , j` SEAI� R. J. Besteman Assistant Secretary �r NOTE: IF YOU HAVE ANY QUESTIONS REGARDING THE VALIDITY OR WORDING OF THIS POWER OF A'1-1'f1WA14'N VAI 1 T111 i U13L`L` .urv,. ...• , • • , .•w. •s••r.:.... *•.... .. .-. — PERFORMANCE BOND BOND CHECK BEST RATING LICENS D 1 TT DAT By STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND PURSUANT TO ARTICLE 5160 OF THE REVISED CIVIL. STATUTES OF TEXAS AS AMENDED BY ACTS OF THE 56TH LEGISLATURE, REGULAR SESSION 1959 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that (hereinafter called the Pri 1a1(s), as Principal(s), and (hereinafter ed urety(s , as gurety, he d firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount ofd ' "'� `��"f` ` Ne �"�` ollars ($�1 y" payment lawful money of the United States for the payment whereo , the said Principff and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. tL WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the Ir day of ` , 19ii; to �p A and said principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in frill force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Article 5160 of the Revised Civil Statutes of Texas as amended by Acts of the 56th Legislature, regular session 1959, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument /this l day of Avg S�/ Principal Z4 *By: By: (Title) KEVIN KFACT NATTYI(Title) By. (Title) By: ' (Title) The undersisurety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby designates !HOWARD Q�{{�t resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship. rety .�,�. *By. 4crieK N I DUNN Approved as to Form ATTY i N FACT City of Lubbock I� By: A 40 EI City Attorney * Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company, there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing that this r person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE -' MINNOW. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE ISSUErYY) S/17/95 PRODUCER THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND j THE INWEST GROUP, INC. CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE 110 N. MARIENFELD ST., SUITE 330 POLICIES BELOW. MIDLAND, TEXAS 79701 COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE COMPANY E LETTER COVERAGES COMPANY A LETTER UNITED STATES FIRE INS. CO. COMPANY B INSURED LETTER HIGHLAND UNDERWRITERS INS. CO. I BRUCE THORNTON AIR CONDITIONING, INC. ETTERNY G. UNITED STATES FIRE INS. CO. 128 SLATON ROAD POLICY EFFECTIVE POLICY EXPIRATION LIMITS DATE (MMIDDIYYI DATE (MMIDDIYY) LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79404 LETTERNY D HIGHLAND INSURANCE COMPANY COMPANY E LETTER COVERAGES THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. CO LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE POLICY EXPIRATION LIMITS DATE (MMIDDIYYI DATE (MMIDDIYY) A GENERAL LIABILITY GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2000000 X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY 5031380286 9/23/94 9/23/95 PROD U CTS -COM PIOP AGG. $ 1000000 CLAIMS MADE X OCCUR. PERSONAL & ADV. INJURY S 1000000 OWNER'S & CONTRACTOR'S PROT. EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1000000 FIRE DAMAGE (Any one fire) $ 50000 MED. EXPENSE (Any one person) $ 5000 B AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY BTA114905 COMBINED SINGLE 9/23/94 9/23/95 LIMIT $ X ANY AUTO 1000000 ALL OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY $ SCHEDULED AUTOS (Per person) x HIRED AUTOS BODILY INJURY $ X NON -OWNED AUTOS (Per accident) GARAGE LIABILITY PROPERTY DAMAGE $ c EXCESS LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ 2000000 5530173426 9/23/94 9/23/95 $ X UMBRELLA FORM AGGREGATE OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM X STATUTORY LIMITS D WORKER'S COMPENSATION BWC230069 9/23/94 9/23/95 EACH ACCIDENT $ 1000000 AND DISEASE—POLICY LIMIT $ 1fl00000 EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY DISEASE—EACH EMPLOYEE $ 1000000 E OTHER PER PROJECT 12153,866., INSTALLATION 321076274 9/23/94 9/23/95 DISASTER 3000000 FLOATER TRANSIT 250000 OF OPERATIONSPLOCATIONSIVEHICLES!SPECIAL ITEMS �DESCRIPTION RE: CITY OF LUBBOCK - BID #13193 - AIR CONDITIONING FOR LUBBOCK MUNICIPAL COLISEUM ADDITIONAL INSURED IN FAVOR OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK EXCEPT WORK COMP, CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE CITY OF LUBBOCK EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO P. 0. BOX 2000 MAIL 10 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79457 LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALLI POSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON T MP Y, ITS NTS OREPRESENTATIVES. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE I Y 1; Lb'& J EIA7W xp, __ ACORD 25-S (7190) OACORD CORPORATION 1990 MR ISSUE DATE (MM/ODYYY) Im mvanu!® CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE 5/17/95 '"PRODUCER THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE 'THE INWEST GROUP, INC. DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE 110 N. MARIENFELD ST., SUITE 330 POLICIES BELOW.- MIDLAND, TEXAS 79701 COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE 'IRE: CITY OF LUBBOCK - BID #13193 - AIR CONDITIONING F f CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE i CITY OF LUBBOCK EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO P. 0. BOX 2000 MAIL 10 - DAYS WRITTEN 'NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79457 LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL' IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE -CO NY, ITSA1 ENTSt� REPRESENTATIVES. = rrk— _ w —. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE ' CACORD CORPORATION 199C ACORD 75-S (7190) -- COMPANY A LETTER UNITED STATES FIRE INS. CO. COMPANY LETTER INSURED BRUCE THORNTON AIR CONDITIONING, INC. COMPANY `+ LETTER 128 SLATON ROAD COMPANY D LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79404 LETTER COMPANY Y LETTER I _ COVERAGES THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS 1111111111r INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED S OWN MAOYRHAVEBBEEN EDUCED BY PAIIDBCLDAMsEIN EXCLUS DNS AND CONDITIONSOOF SUCH POLICIES.LIMITS POLICY EFFECTIVE POLICY EXPIRATION LIMITS CO TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER DATE (MMIDDIYY) DATE (MMIDDIYY) LTR GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 1000000 GENERAL LIABILITY A / 5/17/95 9/23/95 PROD UCTS-CO MPIOPAGG. S COMMERCIAL GENERA L LIABILITY 543065084 CLAIMS MADE X OCCUR. PERSONAL & AOV. INJURY $ EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1000000 I X OWNER'S & CONTRACTOR'S PROT. $ FIRE DAMAGE (Any one fire) MED. EXPENSE (Any one person) 5 v COMBINED SINGLE $ ' AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY LIMIT ANY AUTO ALL OWNED AUTOS BODILY WJURY $ (Per person) SCHEDULED AUTOS BODILY INJURY $ WRED AUTOS (Per accident) NON, -OWNED AUTOS GARAGE LIABILITY PROPERTY DAMAGE EACH OCCURRENCE $ EXCESS LIABILITY AGGREGATE $ UMBRELLA FORM OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM - STATUTORY LIMITS ?• WORKER'S COMPENSATION EACH ACCIDENT � AND DISEASE—POLICY LIMIT $ EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY DISEASE—EACH EMPLOYEE $ OTHER NAMED INSURED: CITY OF LUBBOCK i P. 0. BOX 2000 LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79457 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONSIVEHICLESISPECIAL ITEMS OR LUBBOCK MUNICIPAL COLISEUM 'IRE: CITY OF LUBBOCK - BID #13193 - AIR CONDITIONING F f CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE i CITY OF LUBBOCK EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO P. 0. BOX 2000 MAIL 10 - DAYS WRITTEN 'NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79457 LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL' IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE -CO NY, ITSA1 ENTSt� REPRESENTATIVES. = rrk— _ w —. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE ' CACORD CORPORATION 199C ACORD 75-S (7190) -- a May 19, 1995 1 To Whom it May Concern: GROUP, INC- A builders risk is applicable to new construction, either a building being constructed new or a building with new construction being added to it. Bruce Thornton Air,Conditioning carries an installation floater, which covers the project, the way a builders risk covers a new building under construction. It covers materials, supplies, machinery, fixtures, eguipment,(that he owns or for which he is legally.liabls) and temporary structures, such as office trailers, scaffolding, construction forms and cribbing while at the installation site needed to completely prepare the facility and install to fulloperation the heating and air conditioning systems, whether it is Bruce Thornton Air Conditioning or a subcontractor under Bruce Thornton Air Conditioning doing the work. If you have any questions, or would like to dis'cu'ss this over the phone for more clarification, please feel free to give me a call at 1-800-388-8019. Best regards, *AngeGoflf, CIC, ISR - The InWesc Cruu , lnC. �. IMPORTANT NOTICE To obtain information or make a complaint: You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance to obtain information on companies, coverages, rights or complaints at: 1-800-252-3439 1 You may write the Texas Department of Insurance: P.O. Box 149104 Austin, TX 78714-9104 FAX # (512)475-1771 PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES: Should you have a dispute concerning your premium or about a claim you should contact the agent or the company first. If the dispute is not resolved, you may contact the Texas Department of Insurance. ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR POLICY: This notice is for information only and does not become a part or condition of the attached document. N 1 ko CONTRACTOR CHECKLIST A CONTRACTOR SHALL: (1) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project,for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (2) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (3) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (4) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (A) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (B) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (6) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (7) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must (see reverse) be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 512/440- 3789 to receive information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." and (8) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to; (A) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (B) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (C) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e) (3) of this rule; (D) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (E) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (ii) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (F) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (G) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (H) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 0 1 t 7 CONTRACT 1 jl LI :J 1 i 1 1 1 CONTRACT STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF LUBBOCK THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 11th day of May, 1995, by and between the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through David R. Langston, Mayor, thereunto authorized to do so, hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and BRUCE THORNTON AIR CONDITIONING, INC., the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock, and the State of TEXAS, hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR. WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: BID #13193 - AIR CONDITIONING FOR LUBBOCK MUNICIPAL COLISEUM - $1,263,866.00 and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract documents as defined in the General Condition of Agreement. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents. The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with the bid submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make payment on account thereof as provided therein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County, Texas in the year and day first above written. -1 ATTEST: r &#,- §ecret* APP DYED AS T9 CONTENT: r er's Re sen ve APPROVED AS TO FORM t -r- .' N / N. ATTEST: Corporate Secretary 0 CONTRACTOR: 1 By:. � J, � c "q (Printed or Typed Name) TITLE: COMPLETE ADDRESS: Bruce Thornton Air Conditioning, Inc. 128 Slaton Road Lubbock, Texas 79404 1 P GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT 1 6 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT 1 1. OWNER Whenever the word Owner, or the expression Party of the First Part, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of Lubbock, Texas. r 2. CONTRACTOR Whenever the word Contractor, or the expression Party of the Second Part, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co -partnership or corporation, to -wit: BRUCE THORNTON AIR CONDITIONING, INC. who has agreed to perform the work embraced in this contract, or to his or their legal representative. 3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to City of Lubbock, under whose supervision these contract documents, including FREDDY CHAVEZ, OPERATIONSfENGINEERING SUPERINTENDENT, plans and specifications, were prepared, and who will inspect constructions; or to such other representative, supervisor, or inspector as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, supervisor or inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor or men acting in behalf of the Contractor. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, Bid, Signed Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Ccrtificate, and all other documents made available to Bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. 5. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable," "Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. SUBCONTRACTOR The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due Subcontractor. 7. WRITTEN NOTICE ' Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last business address known to him who gives the notice. 8. WORK Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials, Materials or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such recognized standards. 61 All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment. 10. LAYOUT 66 Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative will check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. 11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE The Contractor shall be furnished with one copies of all Plans, Profiles and Specifications without expense to him and he shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site. 12. RIGHT OF ENTRY The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress of quality of the executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents. He will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work, nor will he be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. His efforts will be directed towards providing assurances for the Owner that the completed project will conform to the requirements of the contract documents, but he will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. On the basis of his onsite observations, he will keep the Owner informed of the progress of the work and will endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the work of the Contractor. 13. LINES AND GRADES All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever necessary for the commencement of the work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend his work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension will be as brief as practical and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor shall give the Owner's Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or , removal by him, his Subcontractors, or his employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Owner's Representative at Contractor's expense. 14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's Representative shall review all work included herein. He has the authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to insure the proper execution of the contract. In order to permit delays and disputes and to discourage litigation, it is further agreed that the Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work which are to be paid for under this contract. He shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The Owner's Representatives's estimates and findings shall be conditions precedent to the right of the parties hereto to arbitration or to any action on the contract, and to any rights of the Contractor to receive any money under this contract; provided, however, that should Owner's Representative render any decision or give any direction, which in the opinion of either party hereto, is not in accordance with the meaning and intent of this contract, either party may file with said Owner's Representative within 30 days his written objection to the decision or direction so rendered, and by such action may reserve the right to submit the questions so raised to arbitration as hereinafter provided. It is the intent of this Agreement that there shall be no delay in the execution of the work, therefore, written decisions or direction of the Owner's Representative as rendered shall be promptly carried out, and any claim arising therefrom shall be thereafter adjusted to arbitration as hereinafter provided. The Owner's Representative shall, within a reasonable time, render and deliver to both the Owner and the Contractor a written decision on all claims of the parties hereto and on all questions which may arise relative to the execution of the work or the interpretation of the contract, specifications and plans. Should the Owner's Representative fail to make such decision within a reasonable time, an appeal to arbitration may be taken as if his decision had been rendered against the party appealing. 15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said material is furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or inspector, the Contractor may within six (6) days make written appeal to the Owner's Representative for his decision. 16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions given to him shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. Adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance of the work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor. The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the Contractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor. The Owner or Owner's Representatives will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any subcontractors, or any of his agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work. II 17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way effect the work under this contract. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, either before or after the execution of this contract, shall effect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. 18. CHARACTER OF WORKMEN The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent men, skillful in the performance in the type of work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall inform him in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in his opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, or disorderly, such man or men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's Representative's written consent. 14. CONSTRUCTION PLANT The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution and completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and it is also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or protection of any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted. The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the Owner's Representative shall direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structure shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 20. SANITATION Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced. 21. OBSERVATION AND TESTING The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all reasonable times to observe and test the work. Contractor shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and testing at any location wherever work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any observation which may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to the time each part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Representative may reject any work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Observer has previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any work should be covered without approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for examination at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representative to make observations of such work or require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to furnish Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents. If any work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the requirements of any such tests, inspections or approval, and any work which meets the requirements of any such tests or approval but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective. Such defective work shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, not inspections, tests, or approvals made by Owner, Chwncr's Representative, or other persons authorized under this agreement to make such inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from his obligation to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. 22, DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES It is further agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owners' Representative as unsuitable or not in conformity with plans, specification and contract documents, the Contractor shall, ager receipt of written notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in full accordance with this contract. It is further agreed that any remedial action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense. 23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit, in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying bond. If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they inCrease the amount of work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract; otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for any actual loss occasioned by such change, due to actual expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned. 24. EXTRA WORK The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered by Contractor's proposal, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein. It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representative when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following methods: Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is commenced, then the Contractor shall be paid the actual field cost of the work, plus fifteen (15%) per cent. In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C), then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred, together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workmen's Compensation and all other insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost shall be kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and compensate him for his profit, overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "actual field cost." No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing Owner's Representative. In case any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which he should receive compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, he shall make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as provided under Method (C). The Contractor will thereby preserve the right to submit the matter of payment to arbitration as herein below provided. 25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS It is further agreed that it is the intent of this contract that all work described in the proposal, the specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. If the Contractor finds any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, he should notify the Owners' Representative and obtain a clarification before the bids are received, and if no such request is received by the Owner's Representative prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be considered that the Contractor fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in his proposal to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. It is further understood that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five days prior to the opening of bids. 26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall comply with such order. If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase his force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress. 27 28. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workmen's Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workmen's Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, his sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and save harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees from all suits, actions, or claims of any character whatsoever, brought for or on account of any injuries or damages received or sustained by any person or persons or property, on account of any negligent act or fault of the Contractor or any subcontractor, their agents or employees, in the execution and supervision of said contract, and the project which is the subject matter of this contract, on account of the failure of Contractor or any subcontractor to provide necessary barricades, warning lights, or signs and will be required to pay any judgment with costs which may be obtained against the Owner or any of its officers, agents, or employees including attorney's fees. The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in his sole discretion as an Independent Contractor; inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses, are intended as reminders to the Contractor of his duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of his subcontractors. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with tliis contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted prior to contract execution. A. Comprehensive General Liability Insurance The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit in the aggregate and per occurrence to include: Premises and Operations Explosion & Collapse Hazard Underground Damage Hazard Products & Completed Operations Hazard Contractual Liability Independent Contractors Coverage Personal Injury (with exclusion "c" waived) The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job, and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. B. Owner's Protective or Contingent Public Liability Insurance and Property Damage Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall obtain an Owner's Protective or Contingent Public Liability Insurance policy naming the City of Lubbock as insured and the amount of such policy shall be as follows: For bodily injuries, including accidental death and or property damage, $1 000,000 Combined Single Limit_ This policy shall be submitted prior to contract execution. C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than; Bodily Injury/Property Damage, $1,000.000 Combined. Single Limit, to include all owned and nonowned cars including: Employers Nonownership Liability Hired and Nonowned Vehicles. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specificjob and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. D. Builder's Risk Insurance The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of 100% of the total contract price (100% of potential loss) naming the City of Lubbock as insured. E. Umbrella Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Umbrella Liability Insurance in the amount of $2.000,000 on all contracts with coverage to correspond with Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehensive Automobile Liability coverages. F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $1.000.000 Definitions: Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self - insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83, or TWCC- 84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project. Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in L1406.096) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner -operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. The contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. 4 The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the contract. If the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. The contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on the project, and provide to the governmental entity: (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (b) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. 6 The contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. 7. The contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project. 8, The contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. 9. The contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on the project, to: (a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (b) provide to the contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project, (c) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by paragraphs (1) - (7), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 10. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the contractor who will provide services on the project will be covered by workers's compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. 11. The contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. G. Proof of Coverage Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the insurance company setting forth: (1) The name and address of the insured. (2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies. (3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured at the address shown in the bid specifications. (6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate. (7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the job specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable. (8) If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project (9) A Contractor shall: (a) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (b) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (c) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (ii) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (g) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: 11 REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee. " "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 512/440.3789 to receive information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage. " and (h) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to pro,6de services on a project, to: (i) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (ii) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (iii) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e) (3) of this rule, 11 (iv) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (v) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (vi) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (vii) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (viii) contractually require each other person ,�vzth whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 29. DISABLED EMPLOYEES Contractors having more than 15 employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, and agree not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such individual in regard to job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee compensation, job training, and other terms, conditions, and priviliges of employment. 30. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS LABORERS MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY E UIPMENT AND SUPPLIES The Contractor agrees that he -ail] indemnify and save the Owner harmless from all claims growing out of any demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, all suppliers, including commissary, incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. If during the progress of the work, Contractor shall allow any indebtedness to accrue for work furnished by any of those designated in the preceding paragraph and shall fail to pay and discharge any such indebtedness within five (5) days after demand is made, then Owner may, during the period for which such indebtedness shall remain unpaid, withhold from the unpaid portion of this contract, a sum equal to the amount of such unpaid indebtedness or may apply the sum so withheld to discharge any such indebtedness. Any and all communications between any party under this paragraph must be in writing. 31. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION The contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or Owner thereof. The Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and save the Owner harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified or required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner harmless I from any loss on account thereof. If the material or process specified or required by Owner is an infringement, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless he promptly gives written notice to the Owner of such infringement. 32. LAWS AND ORDINANCES The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and regulations, which in any manner effect the contract or the work, and shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner against any claims arising from the violation of any such taws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor or his employees. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall promptly notify the Owners' Representative in writing and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work. If the Contractor performs any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's Representative, he shall bear all costs arising therefrom. The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. 33. ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING The Contractor further agrees that he will retain personal control and will give his personal attention to the fulfillment of this contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from his full obligations to the Owner, as provided by this contractual agreement. 34. TIME FOR COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract of work to be done hereunder are essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this contract shall be commenced on a date to be specified in the Notice to Proceed. N1 If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to complete the work within the time herein specified, or any proper extension thereof granted by the Owner, then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $100,00 (One Hundred) PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each and every calendar day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for completing the work. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that.the time for the completion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic change and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because of the impracticability and extreme difficulty in fixing and ascertaining actual damages the Owner would in such event sustain, and the amount is agreed to be damages the Owner would sustain and shall be retained by the Owner from current periodical estimates for payments or from final payment. It is further agreed and understood between the Contractor and Owner that time is of the essence of this contract. 35. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall be allowed to prosecute his work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the proposals; provided, also, that when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by his own force, the Owner's Representative may direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized. The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative, schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor proposes to carry on the work, with dates at which the Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. 36. EXTENSION OF TME The Contractor agrees that he has submitted his proposal in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 33 hereinabove set forth and that he shall not be entitled to, nor will he request, an extension of time on this contract, except when his work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors employed by the owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public enemy, fire or flood. The Contractor may apply in writing for an extension of time, submitting therewith all written justification as may be required by Owner's Representative for such an extension as requested by Contractor. The Owner's Representative within ten (10) days after receipt of a written request for an extension of time by the Contractor supported by all requested documentation shall then submit such written request to the City Council of the City of Lubbock for their consideration. Should the Contractor disagree with the action of City Council on granting an extension of time, such disagreement shall be settled by arbitration as hereinafter provided. I 37. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS In executing the contract agreement, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work V-6thin the time herein fixed, he has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such work, whether growing out of delays in securing material or workmen or otherwise. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in which event, such expense as in the judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor. 38. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed Iength, area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided.In the event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing their proposals offered for the work. It is understood and agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project. 39. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY a The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and he shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. The Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner against any claim or claims for damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, arising or growing out of the performance of this contract, but such indemnity shall not apply to any claim of any kind arising out of the existence or character of the work. 40. PRICE FOR WORK In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the proposal attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all expenses incurred by him and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's Representative. 41. PAYMENTS No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner which have not theretofore been timely fled as provided in this contract. 42. PARTIAL PAYMENTS On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application for partial payment. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial payment and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order shall prepare a certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor up to and including the last day of the preceding month; said statement shall also include the value of all sound materials delivered on site of the work that are to be fabricated into the work. The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by Owner under the terms of this agreement. It is understood, however, that in case the whole work be near to completion, and this fact is certified to by Owner's Representative and some unexpected and some unusual delay occurs due to no fault or negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Owner may upon written recommendation of Owner's Representative pay a reasonable and equitable portion of the retained percentage due Contractor. 43, FINAL. COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE Within thirty-one (3 1) days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been completed or substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and the Owner shall inspect the work and within said ' time, if the work be found to be completed or substantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the Owner's Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor his certificate of completion, and thereupon it shall be the duty of the Owner within thirty-one (3 1) days to issue a certificate of acceptance of the work to the Contractor. 44. FINAL PAYMENT Upon the issuance of the certificate of completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement and prepare a final statement of the value of all work performed and materials furnished under the terms of the agreement, and shall certify same to the Owner, who shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31 st day ager the date of certificate of completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement, provided he has fully performed his contractual obligations under the terms of this contract; and said payment shall become due in any event upon said performance by the Contractor. Neither the certificate of acceptance nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the special conditions (if any) of this contract or required in the specifications made a part of this contract. 45. CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT FOR WORK Contractor shall promptly remove from Owners' premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative on account of failure to conform to the contract, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and Contractor shall at his own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming to the requirements of the contract. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense. 46. CORRECTION OF WORK AFTER FINAL PAYMENT Neither the final payment nor certificate nor any provision in this contract shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and he shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of substantial completion. The Owner or the Owner's Representative shall give notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness. 47. PAYMENT WIMIELD The Owner may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any certificate to such extent as may be necessary to protect himself from loss on account of: (a) Defective work not remedied. (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims. (c) Failure of the Contractor to make payments promptly to subcontractors or for materials or labor. (d) Damage to another contractor. When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, which will protect the Owner in the amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. 48. TIME OF FILING CLAIMS It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) days after the Owner's Representative has given any directions, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception. The Owners' Representative shall reply to such written exceptions by the Contractor and render his final decision in writing. In case the Contractor should appeal from the decision of the Owner's Representative, any demand for arbitration shall be filed with the Owner's Representative and the Owner in writing within ten (10) days after the date of delivery to Contractor of the final decision of the Owner's Representative. It is further agreed that final acceptance of the work by the Owner and the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any claim by either party, except where noted otherwise in the contract documents. 49. ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR In case the Contractor should abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within ten (10) days after written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or if the Contractor fails to comply with the orders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, this Agreement, or the Specifications hereto attached, then the Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the Contractor. After receiving said notice of abandonment, the Contractor shall not remove from the work any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement. In case the Surety should fail to commence compliance with the notice for completion hereinbefore provided for within ten (10) days after service of such notice, then the Owner may provide for completion of the work in either of the following elective manners: (a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or his Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner; or ' (b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain bound therefore. However, should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be credited therewith. When the work shall have been substantially completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certificates of completion and acceptance, as provided in paragraph 42 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to Contractor and his Surety, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be, shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certificate of completion. In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract, or when the Contractor and/or his Surety shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the Contractor and/or his Surety. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor and/or his Surety fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the Contractor and his Surety at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) days from the date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies which remain on the *jobsite and belong to persons other than the Contractor or his Surety, to their proper owners. 50. ABANDONMENT BY OWNER In case the Owner shall fail to comply with the terms of this contract, and should fail or refuse to comply with said terms within ten (10) days after written notification by the Contractor, then the Contractor may suspend or wholly abandon the work, and may remove therefrom all machinery, tools, and equipment, and all materials on the ground that have not been included in payments to the Contractor and have not been incorporated into the work. Thereupon, the Owner's Representative shall make an estimate of the total amount earned by the Contractor, which estimate shall include the value of all work actually completed by said Contractor at the prices stated in the the attached proposal, the value of all partially completed work at a fair and equitable price, and the amount of all Extra Work performed at the prices agreed upon, or provided for by the terms of this contract, and a reasonable sum to cover the cost of any provisions made by the Contractor to carry the whole work to completion, and which cannot be utilized. The Owner's Representative shall then make a final statement of the balance due the Contractor by deducting from the above estimate all previous payments by the Owner and all other sums that may be retained by the Owner under the terms of this Agreement, and shall certify same to the Owner l� who shall pay to the Contractor on or before thirty (30) days after the date of the notification by the Contractor the balance shown by said final statement as due the Contractor, under the terms of this Agreement. 51. BONDS The successful bidder shall be required to furnish a performance bond and payment bond in accordance with Article 5160, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes in the amount of 100q/o of the total contract price, in the event said contract price exceeds $25,000.00. If the contract price does not exceed. $25,000.00, the statutory bonds will not be required. All bonds, if rcqui red, shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to do business in the State of Texas. And it is further agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so furnished. 52. SPECIAL CONDITIONS In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special conditions conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall control. 53, LOSSES FROM NA'T'URAL CAUSES Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the same, or from unusual obstructions or difficulties which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. 54. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority to direct, supervise, and control his own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's work during his performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation. 55. CLEANING UP The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at the completion of the work he shall remove all such debris and also his tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor. CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS 11 TTE Ranett#,Boyd, City Secretary APPROVED TO ONTENT: Bi 1 P yne, 0 rector of Building Services if . e , /// : B.C. McMINN, MAYOR APPROVED AS TO FORM: D6nald G. Vandiver, First Assistant City Attorney Kesolution ;2502 January 8, 1987 Agenda Item #18 DGV:da - RESOLUTION WHEREAS, the City Council has heretofore established the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for each craft or type of workmen or mechanics needed to execute public works contracts for the City of Lubbock in accordance with the provisions of Vernon's Ann.Civ.St., Art. 5159x; and WHEREAS, such wage rates were established by Resolution No. 719 enacted February 12, 1981, updated by Resolution No. 1590 enacted February 23, 1984; and WHEREAS, such rates need to be updated at the present time in order to reflect the current prevailing rate of per diem wages; NOW THEREFORE: BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for public works contracts shall be as set forth in the following named exhibits, which exhibits shall be attached hereto and made a part hereof for all intents and purposes: Exhibit A: Building Construction Trades Exhibit B: Paving and Highway Construction Trades Exhibit C: Electrical Trades Exhibit D: Overtime Rate Exhibit E: Weekend and Holiday Rate Such wage rates are hereby found and declared to be the general prevailing rate of per diem wages in all localities where public works are undertaken on behalf of the City of Lubbock and such wage rates shall be included in all public works contracts as provided by law. Passed by the City Council this 8th day of January 1987. 11 TTE Ranett#,Boyd, City Secretary APPROVED TO ONTENT: Bi 1 P yne, 0 rector of Building Services if . e , /// : B.C. McMINN, MAYOR APPROVED AS TO FORM: D6nald G. Vandiver, First Assistant City Attorney EXHIBIT A City of Lubbock Building Construction Trades Prevailing Rates Craft Acoustical Ceiling Installer Air Conditioner Installer Air Conditioner Installer -Helper Bricklayer Bricklayer -Helper Carpenter Carpenter -Helper Cement Finisher Drywall Hanger Electrician Electrician -Helper Equipment Operator - Heavy Light Floor Installer Glazier Insulator, Piping/Boiler Insulator -Helper Iron Worker Laborer, General Mortar Mixer Painter Plumber Plumber -Helper Roofer Roofer -Helper Sheet Metal Worker Sheet Metal Worker -Helper Welder - Certified V. Hourly Rate $11.60 8.35 5.50 10.50 5.00 11.00 5.50 7.35 8.70 10.50 5,25 8.00 5.70 8.00 7.50 9.50 5.00 7.30 4.75 5.60 8.75 9.25 6.00 7.65 4.75 8.75 5.50 8.00 Craft EXHIBIT 8 Paving and Highway Construction Prevailing Mage Rates Asphalt Heaterman Asphalt Shoveler Concrete Finisher Concrete Finisher -Helper Electrician Fl agger Form Setter Form Setter -Helper Laborer, General Laborer, Utility Mechanic Mechanic -Helper POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS Asphalt Paving Machine Bulldozer Concrete Paving Machinist Front End Loader Heavy Equipment Operator Light Equipment Operator Motor Grade Operator Roller Scraper Tractor Truck Driver - Light Heavy Hourly Rate $5.25 4.75 7.35 4.75 10.50 4.75 6.50 5.50 4.75 5.80 6.50 6.00 6.00 5.25 6.50 5.85 6.40 6.40 8.00 5.25 5.25 5.50 5.25 5.25 • t r Craft EXHIBIT C Electric Construction Trades Prevailing Wage Rates Power Line Foreman Lineman Journeyman Lineman Apprentice Series Groundman Series EXHIBIT D Prevailing Wage Rates Overtime Rate Hour!Rate $11.00 10.45 8.90 7.25 The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) is 1 1/2 times base rate. EXHIBIT E Prevailing Wage Rates Weekend and Holiday Rate The rate for weekend and holiday is�l 1/2 times base rate. SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS jig FOR THE CITY OF LUBBOCK ' A/C FOR THE LUBBOCK MUNICIPAL COLISEUM , LUBBOCK, TEXAS �•,�� a .. �: .: OF Ali *,JACKA. _ F. R09ERT5 �:�..,......: '.,..'r......_.,.� �. � .... .. . '`d... .. .. JOti"J •. fir. "� .►. 6r.4r►ur s. Yir...ia...r ro : 9325307 AND ASSOCIATES INC. ' FANNING, FANNING CONSULTING ENGINEERS 2555 - 74TH STREET LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79423 TEL: (806) 745-2533 FAX: (806) 745-3596 JANUARY, 1995 SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CITY OF LUBBOCK A/C FOR THE LUBBOCK MUNICIPAL COLISEUM -rt LUBBOCK, TFYA.q FANNING, FANNING AND ASSOCIATES, INI CONSULTING ENGINEERS 2555 - 74TH STREET LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79423 TEL: (806) 745-2533 FAX: (806) 745-3596 JANUARY, 1995 JOHN A. F AN N I NIG a JACK f. Omni 9325 SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CITY OF LUBBOCK A/C FOR THE LUBBOCK MUNICIPAL COLISEUM -rt LUBBOCK, TFYA.q FANNING, FANNING AND ASSOCIATES, INI CONSULTING ENGINEERS 2555 - 74TH STREET LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79423 TEL: (806) 745-2533 FAX: (806) 745-3596 JANUARY, 1995 JOHN A. F AN N I NIG A/C FOR THE LUBBOCK MUNICIPAL COLISEUM CITY OF LUBBOCK SPECIFICATIONS INDEX STRUCTURAL 2A EARTHWORK 10 3A CONCRETE WORK 20 5A STRUCTURAL STEEL 9 MECHANICAL u 11 11 11 15A SITE UTILITIES 7 15B PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 10 15C PLUMBING SYSTEMS 1 15D STEAM AND CONDENSATE RETURN SYSTEM 7 15E CHILLED AND HEATING WATER SYSTEMS 3 15F MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION 4 15G AIR DISTRIBUTION 3 15H HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 4 15I INSULATION 6 15J EQUIPMENT 9 15K TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 2 15L TEMPERATURE REGULATION 10 ELECTRICAL 16A RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 8 16B CONDUCTORS 3 16C WIRING DEVICES 2 16D ELECTRICAL SERVICE 2 16E GROUNDING 2 16F ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION 4 16G LIGHTING 2 16H MOTORS AND EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND WIRING 3 16I SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM FOR FAN SHUTDOWN 7 u 11 11 11 DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT DIVISIONS: BASE BID: Install Air Conditioning for the upper level seating and the playing floor in City of Lubbock Municipal Coliseum. Install the chilled water piping system interconnection between the Texas Tech University Utility system and the City of Lubbock Auditorium/Coliseum system. Steam and Condensate piping in the City of Lubbock tunnel shall consist of loose pipe lying on the tunnel floor. This pipe will not be assembled, installed or insulated. No expansion joints are required for steam and condensate piping. Cap steam and condensate piping down stream of valves. ADD ALTERNATE NO. 1: Assemble, install and insulate the Steam and Condensate piping in the City of Lubbock tunnel with a connection to the Texas Tech University Steam system. Terminate with drip trap to pumped condensate return and cap steam and condensate. ADD ALTERNATE NO. 2: Install the Air Conditioning system serving the Coliseum Lower Level Concourse. ADD ALTERNATE NO. 3: Install the Air Conditioning system serving the Coliseum Lower Level North Texas Tech Team Locker Rooms. ADD ALTERNATE NO. 4: Install the Air Conditioning system serving the Coliseum Concourse Level South Visiting Team Locker Rooms. NOTE All demolition and tunnel construction shall be done during the summer. Connections to Texas Tech University Utilities shall be done during Summer School Breaks. Students will be off campus at that time. END OF SECTION SECTION 2A - EARTHWORK PART I - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 specification sections, apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: The extent of earthwork is shown on drawings. Backfilling outside of tunnels is included as part of this work. See 15A for opening and reclosing pavement. See detail sheet S-2 for paving cut. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Codes and Standards: Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction. Safety Precautions and Programs: It shall be the duty and responsibility of the Contractor and all of its subcontractors to be familiar and comply with all requirements of Public Law 91-596, 29 U.S.C. Secs. 651 et seq., the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, (OSHA) and all amendments thereto, and to enforce and comply with all of the provisions of this Act. In addition, the Contractor on this project and all of its subcontractors shall comply with all requirements of 29 C.F.R. Secs. 1926.652 and 1926.653, OSHA Safety and Health Standards. Before commencing any trench excavation which will exceed a depth of five feet, the Contractor will provide the Owner with detailed plans and specifications regarding the safety systems to be utilized. Said plans and specifications shall include a certification from a registered professional engineer indicating full compliance with the OSHA provisions printed above. The Contractor shall require a pay item classification, pursuant to paragraph 7.1 of the above document, for the particular safety system to be utilized. Testing and Inspection service: Employ, at Contractor's expense, testing laboratory to perform soil testing and inspection service for quality control testing during earthwork operations. The testing laboratory shall acceptable to the Owner and engineer and shall comply with the requirements of ASTM D3740, Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil or Rock Used In Engineering Design and Construction. 2A-1 93008 SUBMITTALS• Test Reports: Submit following reports directly to the Engineer from the testing services, with copies to Contractor. Test reports on existing or borrow material for each type of soil encountered. 1. Atterberg Limits 2. Linear Shrinkage 3. Optimum moisture/maximum dry density curve Field density test reports of subgrades and compacted fills. Reports shall indicate soil type or change of soil if any other is used. JOB CONDITIONS: Site Information: 1. A subsurface soils investigation at the site has not been performed. Test borings and other exploratory operations may be made by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities in areas of work. If utilities are to remain in place, provide adequate means of protection during earthwork operations. 3. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, consult utility owner immediately for directions. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping respective services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner. 4. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by Owner or others, except when permitted in writing by the Engineer and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been provided. 5. Use of Explosives: The use of explosives is not permitted. 6. Protection of Persons and Property: Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post with warning lights. 7. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction. 8. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout and other hazards created by earthwork operations.. 2A-2 93008 9. All work crossing Sixth Street may include closing the street to vehicular traffic. The street may be closed for a period not to exceed 14 days. Coordinate this time period with the City of Lubbock through their project coordinator, Mr. Freddy Chavez. All work including excavation, forming and pouring concrete, backfill and paving must be completed during this time period. PART II - PRODUCTS SOIL MATERIALS: Satisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, GC, SC, CL, SM, SW and SP. Unsatisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups CH, ML, MH, OL, OH, and PT. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, crushed slag, natural or crushed sand. Topsoil shall be fertile, natural soil of loamy character, free of clay lumps, stones and debris. Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials free of clay, rock or gravel larger than 2" in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetable and other deleterious matter. Fill materials shall have a liquid limit between 4 and 30 and the plasticity index shall be between 4 and 12. PART III - EXECUTION EXCAVATION: Excavation consists of removal and disposal of material encountered when establishing required finish grade elevations. Earth excavation includes removal and disposal of pavements and other obstructions visible on ground surface, underground structures and utilities indicated to be demolished and removed, material of any classification encountered that are not classified as unauthorized excavation. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific direction of the Engineer. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by the Engineer, shall be at Contractor's expense. M I� 2A-3 ii 93008 Under footings, tunnel floors, fill unauthorized excavation by extending indicated bottom elevation of footing or base to excavation bottom, without altering required top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used to bring elevations to proper position, when acceptable to the Engineer. Elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized excavations of same classification, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Additional Excavation: When excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, notify the Engineer who will make an inspection of conditions. If unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at required subgrade elevations, carry excavations deeper and replace excavated material as directed by the Engineer. Removal of unsuitable material and its replacement as directed will be paid on basis of contract conditions relative to changes in work. Stability of Excavations: 1. Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes and ordinances having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated. 2. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of backfilling. 3. Shoring and Bracing: Provide materials for shoring and bracing, such as uprights, stringers and cross -braces, in good serviceable condition. 4. Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply with local codes and authorities having jurisdiction. 5. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period excavations will be open. Carry down shoring and bracing as excavation progresses. 6. Dewatering: Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area. 7. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other 2A-4 93008 COMPACTION: General: Control soil compaction during construction providing minimum percentage of density specified for each area classification. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry density for soils which exhibit a well-defined moisture -density relationship determined in accordance with ASTM D 698 (Standard Proctor), and not less than the following percentages of relative density, determined in accordance with ASTM D 2049, for soils which will not exhibit a well-defined moisture -density relationship. 2A-5 � 93008 dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations. ' from and rain water to 8. Convey water removed excavations collecting or run-off areas. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits for each structure. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches. 9. Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where directed, until required for backfill or fill. Place, grade and shape stockpiles for proper drainage. 10. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. 11. Dispose of excess soil material and waste materials as herein . specified. Excavation for Tunnels: 1. Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot, and extending a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit placing and removal of bd concrete formwork, installation of services, other construction, and for inspection. 2. In excavating for footings and foundations, take care not to disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before concrete reinforcement is placed. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. 3. Excavation for Pavements: Cut surface under pavements to comply with cross-sections, elevations and grades as shown. 4. Cold Weather Protection: Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric temperature is less than 35 degrees F. (1 degree C.) COMPACTION: General: Control soil compaction during construction providing minimum percentage of density specified for each area classification. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry density for soils which exhibit a well-defined moisture -density relationship determined in accordance with ASTM D 698 (Standard Proctor), and not less than the following percentages of relative density, determined in accordance with ASTM D 2049, for soils which will not exhibit a well-defined moisture -density relationship. 2A-5 � 93008 Structures: Compact top 12" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95% maximum dry density or 90% relative dry density. Tunnel Slabs: Compact top 12" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95% maximum dry density or 90% relative dry density. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 90% maximum dry density. Walkways: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill materials at 95% maximum dry density or 90% relative dry density. Pavements: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95% maximum dry density or 90% relative dry density for cohesive soil material. Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade, or layer of soil material, to prevent free water appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction operations. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit compaction to specified density. Soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compaction may be stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry. Assist drying by dicing, harrowing or pulverizing until moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value. BACKFILL AND FILL: General: Place acceptable soil material in layers to required subgrade elevations, for each area classification listed below. In excavations, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material. Under grassed areas, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material. Under walks and pavements, use subbase materials, or satisfactory excavated or borrow material, or combination of both. See detail on Sheet S-2 for paving cut slab reinforcement. Under slabs, use satisfactory borrow material. 2A-6 93008 Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following: 1. Acceptance of construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing, or waterproofing. 2. Inspection, testing, approval, underground utilities. 3. Removal of concrete formwork. and recording locations of 4. Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids with satisfactory materials. 5. Removal of trash and debris. 6. Permanent or temporary horizontal bracing is in place on horizontally supported walls. Ground Surface Preparation: 1. Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placement of fills. Plow, strip, or break-up so that fill material will bond with existing surface. 2. When existing ground surface has a density less than that specified under "Compaction" for particular area classification, break up ground surface, pulverize, moisture -condition to optimum moisture content, and compact to required depth and percentage of maximum density. Placement and Compaction: ' 1. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8" in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 41" in loose depth for material compacted by hand -operated tampers. 2. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum moisture content. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each area classification. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 3. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, to required elevations. Take care to prevent wedging action of backfill against structures by carrying material uniformly around structure to approximately same ' elevation in each lift. 2A-7 ' 93008 GRADING• General: Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this section, including adjacent transition areas. Smooth finished surface within specified tolerances, compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are shown, or between such points and existing grades. Grading Outside Lines of Tunnel Excavation: Grade areas adjacent to tunnel lines to drain away and to prevent ponding. Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes, and as follows: 1, Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Finish areas to receive topsoil to within not more than 0.10 foot above or below required subgrade elevations. 2. Walks:. Shape surface of areas under walks to line, grade and cross-section, with finish surface not more than 0.10 foot above or below required subgrade elevation. 3. Pavements: Shape surface of areas under pavement to line, grade and cross-section, with finish surface not more than 1/2" above or below required subgrade elevation. 4. Grading Surface of Fill Under Slabs: Grade smooth and even, free of voids, compacted as specified, and to required elevation. Provide final grades within a tolerance of 1/2" when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. 5. Compaction: After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to the depth and percentage of maximum density for each area classification. PAVEMENT SUBBASE COURSE: General: Subbase course consists of placing subbase materials, in layers of specified thickness, over subgrade surface to support a pavement base course. Grade Control: During construction, maintain lines and grades including crown and cross -slope of subbase course. Placing: Place subbase course material on prepared subgrade in layers of uniform thickness, conforming to indicated cross-section and thickness. Maintain optimum moisture content for compacting subbase material during placement operations. 2A-8 93008 When a compacted subbase course is shown to be 6" thick or less, place material in a single layer. When shown to be more than 6" thick, place material in equal layers, except no single layer more than 6" or less than 3" in thickness when compacted. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: Quality Control Testing During Construction: 1. Allow testing service to inspect and approve subgrades and fill layers before further construction work is performed. 2. Perform field density tests in accordance with ASTM D 1556 (Sand Cone Method) or ASTM D 2167 (Rubber Balloon Method), or ASTM D 2922, (Nuclear Gauge Method) as applicable. Paved Areas and Tunnel Floor Slab Subgrade: Make at least one field density test of subgrade for every 2040 sq. ft. of paved area or slab, but in no case less than 3 tests. In each compacted fill layer, make one field density test for every 2000 sq. ft. of overlaying building slab or paved area, but in no case less than 3 tests. Subsequent layers shall be placed only after the previous compacted layer has been tested and approved by the testing laboratory and Engineer. Tunnel Wall Backfill: Take at least 2 field density tests, at locations and elevations as directed. If, in opinion of the Engineer, based on testing service reports and inspection, subgrade or fills which have been placed are below specified density, provide additional compaction and testing at no additional expense. MAINTENANCE- Protection of Graded Areas: 1. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. 2. Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to specified tolerances. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, re -shape, and compact to required density prior to further construction. 2A-9 93008 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS Removal from Owner's Property: Remove waste materials, including unacceptable excavated material, trash and debris, and dispose of it off Owner's property. Removal to Designated Areas on Owners' Property: Transport acceptable excess excavated material to designated soil storage areas on Owner's property. Stockpile soil or spread as directed by the Engineer. END OF SECTION 2A-10 93008 SECTION 3A - CONCRETE WORK PART I - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 specification sections, apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: The extent of concrete work is shown on the Drawings. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: ACI 301 ',Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings". ACI 304 "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete". ACI 311 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Inspection". ACI 318 "Building Code. Requirements for Reinforced Concrete". ACI 347 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork". MSP -1-90 Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Manual of Standard Practice". Workmanship: The Contractor is responsible for correction of concrete work which does not conform to the specified requirements, including strength, tolerances and finishes. Correct deficient concrete as directed by the Engineer. Design and Testing: 1. The Contractor shall bear all expenses in connection with securing proper laboratory designed mixes. Mixes proposed for use in this project shall be tested by means of actual cylinder breaks, with all information being reported to the Engineer. A proven, established, mix from an acceptable ready -mix plant may be used. Provide a minimum of 5 recent different compression test reports for the proposed mix. 2. .lob site cylinders shall be taken when the Engineer so directs. The Contractor shall notify the testing laboratory when test cylinders are to be taken. The laboratory shall come to the site and take the concrete cylinders, and be responsible for their care and handling including breaking of same at laboratory. 3A-1 1 93008 3. The laboratory shall be an independent testing laboratory designated by the Engineer and the Owner. 4. All expense for taking and testing concrete cylinders shall be borne by the Contractor. 5. Test results shall be furnished to the Engineer and the Contractor. 6. Any concrete not meeting strength requirements shall be further tested. If further tests indicate concrete will ultimately never meet strength requirements, the understrength concrete will be replaced with new as directed by the Engineer. SUBMITTALS: Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's product data with application and installation instructions for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, and others as requested by the Engineer. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with the ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required at openings through concrete structures. PART II - PRODUCTS FORM MATERIALS• Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Unless otherwise shown or specified, construct all formwork for exposed concrete surfaces with plywood, metal, metal framed plywood -faced or other acceptable panel -type materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on the Drawings. Provide form material with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly -placed concrete without bow or deflection. Forms used for this class of concrete shall be new or "good -as -new". Use plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS -1 "B -B (Concrete Form) Plywood" Class I, Exterior Grade or better, mill -oiled and edgesealed, with each piece bearing legible trademark of an approved inspection agency, unless otherwise acceptable to Engineer. 3A-2 93008 Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Form concrete surfaces which will be unexposed in finished structure with plywood, lumber, metal or other acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least 2 edges and one side for tight fit. Corrugated Steel Forms: Shall be I. OC as manufactured by Vulcraft, a division of Nucor, Grapeland, Texas, or approved equal. Decking shall be formed from 20 gauge galvanized sheets. REINFORCING MATERIALS: Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60. Supports for Reinforcement: 1. Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs, spacers and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI, unless otherwise specified. Wood, brick and other devices will not be acceptable. 2. For slabs -on -grade, use supports with sand plates for horizontal runners where wetted base materials will not support chair legs. 3. For exposed -to -view concrete surfaces, where legs of supports are in contact with forms, provide supports with legs which are hot/dip galvanized, or plastic protected or stainless steel protected. CONCRETE MATERIALS: 1-1 IN 93008 3A-3 Portland Cement: the 1. ASTM C 150, Type I, unless otherwise acceptable to Engineer. 2. Use only one brand of cement throughout the project, unless otherwise acceptable to the Engineer. ' Fine Aggregate: Clean, sharp, natural sand free from loam, clay, lumps or other deleterious substances. Dune sand, bank -run sand and manufactured sand are not acceptable. 1-1 IN 93008 3A-3 Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33. Clean, uncoated, processed aggregate containing no clay, mud, loam or foreign matter as follows: 1. Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone. 2. Washed gravel, either natural or crushed. Use of pit or bank -run gravel is not permitted. 3. Provide aggregate from a single source for all exposed concrete. Maximum Aggregate Size: Not larger than one-fifth of the narrowest dimension between sides of forms, one-third of the depth of slabs, nor three-fourths of the minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars or bundles or bars. These limitations may be waived if, in the judgment of the Engineer, workability and methods of consolidation are such that concrete can be placed without honeycomb or voids. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type C or Type F. Water: Clean, fresh, drinkable. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A, containing not more than 0.1% chloride ions. Set -Control Admixtures: ASTM C 494, as follows:. 1. Type B, Retarding. 2. Type C, Accelerating. 3. Type D, Water -reducing and Retarding. 4. Type E, Water -reducing and Accelerating. Calcium chloride will not be permitted in concrete, unless otherwise authorized in writing by the Engineer. High -Range Water -Reducing Admixture (Super Plasticizer): ASTM C 494, Type F or G containing not more than 0.1% chloride ions. RELATED MATERIALS: Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers: Premolded cane fiber saturated with asphalt. Unless indicated otherwise, 1/2" thickness by depth of slab. Joint Sealing Compound: See Division 7 sections. 3A-4 93008 Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq. yd., complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2. Moisture -Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171, 1. Waterproof paper. 2. Polyethylene film. 3. Polyethylene -coated burlap. Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A unless other type acceptable to the Engineer. PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES: ' Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete in accordance with applicable provisions of ASTM C 94. Use an independent testing facility acceptable to the Engineer for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. The testing facility shall not be the same as used for field quality control testing unless otherwise acceptable to the Engineer. Prepare design mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods, using materials to be employed on the project for each class of concrete required, complying with ACI 211.1. Laboratory Trial Batches: When laboratory trial batches are used to select concrete proportions, prepare test specimens in accordance with ASTM C 192 and conduct strength tests in accordance with ASTM C 39, specified in ACI 301. Establish a curve showing relationship between water -cement ratio (or cement content) and compressive strength, with at least 3 points representing batches ' which produce strengths above and below that required. Use not less than 3 specimens tested at 28 days, or an earlier age when acceptable to the Engineer, to establish each point on the curve. ' Field Experience Method: When field experience methods are used to select concrete proportions, establish proportions as specified in ACI 301. Strength data for establishing standard deviation will be considered suitable if the concrete production facility has certified records consisting of at least 30 consecutive tests in one group or the statistical average for 2 groups totaling 30 or more tests, representing similar materials and project conditions. If standard deviation exceeds 600 psi or if no suitable records are available, select proportions to produce an average strength of at + least 1200 psi greater than the required compressive strength of I concrete. 11 I 1 93008 3A-5 After sufficient experience and test data become available from the job, using ACI 214 methods of evaluation, the standard deviation may be reduced when the probable frequency of an average of 3 consecutive tests below required compressive strength will not exceed 1 in 100. Submit written reports to the Engineer of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have been reviewed by the Engineer. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties, as indicated on the Drawings and schedules: 1. 3000 psi 28 -day compressive strength; W/C ratio, 0.58 maximum (non -air -entrained), 0.46 maximum (air -entrained). Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by the Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, tests results, or other circumstances warrant; at no additional cost to the Owner and as accepted by the Engineer. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by the Engineer before using in the work. ADMIXTURES: Use water -reducing admixture or high range water -reducing admixture (super plasticizer) in concrete as required for placement and workability. Use non -chloride accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50 degrees F. Use air -entrained admixture in exterior exposed concrete, unless otherwise indicated. Add air -entraining admixture at the manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at the point of placement having air content within the following limits: 1. 5.5% with 1 1/2" maximum aggregate 2. 6.0% with 1" maximum aggregate 3. 6.0% with 3/4" maximum aggregate 4. 7.0% with 1/2" maximum aggregate Use admixture for water -reducing and set -control in strict compliance with the manufacturer's directions. Use amounts of admixtures as recommended by the manufacturer for climatic conditions prevailing at the time of placing. Adjust quantities and types of admixtures as required to maintain quality control. 3A-6 93008 SLUMP LIMITS` Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at the point of placement as follows: Ramps and Sloping Surfaces: Not more than 311. Concrete containing HRWR admixture (super plasticizer): Not more than 8" after addition of HRWR to verified 2"-3" slump concrete. All Other Concrete: Not more than 411. CONCRETE MIXING: Ready -Mix Concrete: Comply with the requirements of ANSI/ASTM C 94, and as herein specified. Delete the references for allowing additional water to be added to the batch for material with insufficient slump. Addition of water to the batch will not be permitted. k., During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid setting of concrete, a shorter mixing time than specified in ANSI/ASTM C 94 may be required. When the air temperature is between 85 degrees F. and 90 degrees F., reduce the mixing and delivery time from 1 1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when the air temperature is above 90 degrees F., reduce the mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. ' PART III - EXECUTION FORMS: Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral loads that might be applied until such loads i can be supported by the concrete structure. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation and position. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage to cast -in-place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials. Ir Forms shall not leak cement paste. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against the concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, to prevent swelling and for easy removal. 11 11 93008 3A-7 Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is inaccessible for cleanout, for inspection before concrete placement, and for placement of concrete. Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly to form to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings on forms at inconspicuous locations. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as shown, using wood, metal, PVC or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints. Form Ties: Factory -fabricated, adjustable -length, removable or snapoff metal form ties, designated to prevent form deflection, and to prevent spalling concrete surfaces upon removal. Unless otherwise shown, provide ties so portion remaining within concrete after removal is at least 1 1/2" inside concrete. Unless otherwise shown, provide form ties which will not leave holes larger than 1" diameter in concrete surface. Provisions for other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work for other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt or other debris just before concrete is placed. Retighten forms after concrete placement if required to eliminate mortar leaks. Placing Corrugated Form: 1. Corrugated Form sheets shall be placed end to end, beginning at the corner of the building with the corrugated ribs perpendicular to the framing members. Sheets shall be placed one row at a time, maintaining proper alignment and coverage. Place sheets with edges up and with the ends lapped a minimum of 311. End laps shall be centered over the supporting members, and the sides shall be lapped one half corrugation. 2. Sheets shall be attached to the supporting members by welding through the bottom of the corrugation as soon as they are placed and aligned. Welds shall be made through 16 gauge uncoated welding washers furnished with the corrugated form deck. 3. End laps shall be welded the sheet. Welds at the the center of the sheet alternating pattern. at each side lap and intermediate supports only, and at the side 3A--8 93008 at the center of shall be made at laps only, in an 4. Admixtures containing chloride or chloride salts shall not be used in connection with the galvanized deck. PLACING REINFORCING: Comply with the specified codes and standards, and Concrete Reinforcing steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars", for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports, and as herein specified. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete. Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers, as required. Place reinforcement to obtain at least the minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange, space and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. Do not place reinforcing bars more than 2" beyond the last leg of continuous bar supports. Do not use supports as bases for runways for concrete conveying equipment and similar construction loads. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. JOINTS. Construction Joints: 1. Locate and install construction joints, which are not shown on the Drawings, so as not to impair the strength and appearance of the structure, as acceptable to the Engineer. 2. Provide keyways at least 1 1/2" deep in all construction joints in walls, slabs and between walls and footings; acceptable bulkheads designed for this purpose may be used for slabs. 3. Place construction joints perpendicular to the main reinforcement. Continue all reinforcement across construction joints. 3A-9 93008 Control Joints in Slabs -on -Ground: 1. Construct control joints in slabs -on -ground to form panels or patterns as shown or directed. Form edge of pours with wood forms having keyway. If saw cut control joints are used, they shall be made with a power saw fitted with an abrasive or diamond blade. Saw cuts must be one-fourth the slab thickness. Sawing shall begin as soon as the concrete surface is firm enough so that it will not be torn or damaged by the blade. This will be within 4 to 12 hours after the concrete hardens. 2. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on -Ground: Construct isolation joints in slabs on ground at all points of contact between slabs on ground and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams and elsewhere as indicated. INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS: General: Set and build into the work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to, or supported by, cast -in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions and directions provided by suppliers of the items to be attached thereto. Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs: Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain the required elevations and contours in the finished slab surface. Provide and secure units sufficiently strong to support the types of screed required. Align the concrete surface to the elevation of the screed strips by the use of strike -off templates or accepted compacting type screeds. PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES: Coat the contact surfaces of forms with a form -coating compound before reinforcement is placed. Provide commercial formulation form -coating compounds that will not bond with, stain nor adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces requiring bond or adhesion, nor impede wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing compounds. Thin form -coating compounds only with thinning agent of type, and in amount, and under conditions of the form -coating compound manufacturer's directions. Do not allow excess form -coating material to accumulate in the forms or to come into contact with concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. 3A-10 93008 CONCRETE PLACEMENT: General: Comply with ACI 304, and as herein specified. 1, Add fibrous concrete reinforcement to concrete materials at the time concrete is batched in amounts in accordance with approved submittals for this type of concrete. Mix batched concrete in strict accordance with the fibrous concrete reinforcement manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for uniform and complete dispersion. 2. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as herein specified. 3. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its final location to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. 4. Pre -Placement Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete the formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast -in. Notify other crafts to permit the installation of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work, as required. Thoroughly wet wood forms immediately before placing concrete, as required where form coatings are not used. 5. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 18" and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 5. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand -spading, rodding or tamping. Use vibrators designed to operate with vibratory element submerged in concrete, maintaining a speed of not less than 5000 impulses per minute. 7. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside of forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit the duration of vibration to the time necessary to consolidate the concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of the mix. 3A-11 93008 Placing Concrete Slabs: 1. Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within the limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Bring slab surfaces to the correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth the surface, leaving it free of humps or hollows. Do not sprinkle water on the plastic surface. Do not disturb the slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. 3. Maintain reinforcing in the proper position during concrete placement operations. Cold Weather Placing: 1. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength which could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures, in compliance with ACI 305 and as herein specified. 2. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 degrees F., uniformly heat all water and aggregate before mixing as required to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 degrees F., and not more than 80 degrees F., at point of placement. 3. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 4. Do not use calcium chloride, salt and other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. Hot Weather Placing: 1. When hot weather conditions exist that could seriously impair the duality and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and as herein specified. 2. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90 degrees F. Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control the concrete temperature provided the water equivalent of the ice is calculated to the total amount of mixing. 3A-12 93008 3. Cover reinforcing steel with water -soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that the steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete. Wet form thoroughly before placing concrete. 4. Do not use retarding admixtures unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES: Standard Rough Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces not exposed -to -view in the finish work or by other construction, unless otherwise shown or specified. This is the concrete surface having the texture imparted by the form facing material used, with defective areas repaired and patched as specified, and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4" in height rubbed down with wood blocks. Standard Smooth Finish: For formed concrete surfaces exposed -to -view, or that are to be covered with a coating material applied directly to the concrete or a covering material bonded to the concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, or other similar system. This is the as -cast concrete surface as obtained with the form facing material, with defective areas repaired and patched as specified, and fins and other projections on the surface completely removed and smoothed. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets and similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike -off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise shown. MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES: Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive trowel finish and other finishes as hereinafter specified. or slab surfaces which are to be covered with membrane or elastic roofing, and as shown on the Drawings or in schedules. After screeding and consolidating concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating when surface water has disappeared or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power -driven floats or both. Consolidate surface with power -driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface plane to a tolerance not exceeding 1/411 in 10 feet when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 3A-13 93008 Trowel Finish:. 1. Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to be exposed -to -view. 2. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a power -driven trowel. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over the surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and with a surface plane tolerance not exceeding 1/8" in 10 feet when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. Grind smooth surface defects which would telegraph through applied floor covering system. Non -Slip Broom Finish: 1. Apply non -slip broom finish to exterior concrete flatwork, and elsewhere as shown on the Drawings or in schedules. 2. Immediately after trowel finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with the Engineer before application. CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION: General: 1. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperature, and maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for a period of time necessary for hydration of cement and proper hardening. 2. Start initial curing application as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 72 hours. 3. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete has dried. Continue final curing for at least 168 cumulative hours (not necessarily consecutive) during which concrete has been exposed to air temperatures above 50 degrees F. Avoid rapid drying at end of final curing period. Methods: Perform curing of concrete by moist curing or by moisture retaining cover curing or by membrane -forming curing compound and by combinations thereof, as herein specified. 3A-14 93008 Provide moisture curing by following methods: 1. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. Continuous water -fog spray. 2. Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturating cover with water and keeping continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with 4" lap over adjacent absorptive covers. Provide moisture -cover curing as follows: 1. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3" and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. Provide curing compound for slabs as follows: 1. Apply specified curing and sealing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours). 2. Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power -spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repairing damage during curing period. 3. Lao not apply membrane curing compounds on surfaces which are to be covered with coating material applied directly to concrete, liquid floor hardener, waterproofing, dampproofing, membrane roofing, flooring, painting, and other coatings and finish materials, unless otherwise acceptable to Engineer. 4. Curing Formed surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including undersides of beams, supported slabs and other similar surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable. 5. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Initially cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping, and other flat surfaces by moist curing. 6. Final cure unformed surfaces, unless otherwise specified, by methods specified above, as applicable. 3A-15 93008 7. Final cure concrete surfaces or finish flooring by use of otherwise directed. REMOVAL OF FORMS: to receive liquid floor hardener moisture -retaining cover, unless Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 degrees F. for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam soffits, joists, slabs and other structural elements, may not be removed in less than 14 days and until concrete has attained design minimum compressive strength at 28 -days. Determine potential compressive strength of inplace concrete by testing field -cured specimens representative of concrete location or members. Form facing material may be removed 4 days after placement, only if shores and other vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal of form facing material without loosening or disturbing shores and supports. RE -USE OF FORMS: Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be re -used in the work. Split, frayed, delaminated or otherwise damaged form facing material will not be acceptable. Apply new form coating compound material to concrete contact form surfaces as specified for new formwork. When forms are intended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use "patched" forms for exposed concrete surfaces, except as acceptable to Engineer. MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS: Filling -In: Fill-in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations, as shown on the Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct elevations, 3A-16 93008 complying with certified diagrams or templates of the manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS: Patching Defective Areas: 1. Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removal of forms, but only when acceptable to Engineer. 2. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/4" in any dimension, and holes left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete but, in no case to a depth of less than 1". Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Before placing cement mortar or proprietary patching compound, thoroughly clean, dampen with water and brush -coat the area to be patched with neat cement grout, or proprietary bonding agent. 3. For exposed -to -view surfaces, blend white Portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match color surrounding. Provide test areas at inconspicuous location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike -off slightly higher than surrounding surface. Repair of Formed Surfaces: 1. Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of the Engineer. Surface defects, as such, include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and other projections on surface; and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes, fill with dry pack mortar, or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, that contain defects that adversely affect the durability of the concrete. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace the concrete. Repair of Unformed Surfaces: 1. Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and to verify surface plane to tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as herein specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope, in addition to smoothness, using a template having required slope. 3A-17 93008 2. Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects which adversely affect durability of concrete. Surface defects, as such, include crazing, cracks in excess of 0.01" wide or which penetrate to reinforcement or completely through non -reinforced sections regardless of width, spalling, pop -outs, honeycomb, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions. 3. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding, after concrete has cured at least 14 days. 4. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during, or immediately after completion of surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when acceptable to the Engineer. 5. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1" diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas to sound concrete with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4" clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete, and brush with a neat cement grout coating or concrete bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of the same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in the same manner as adjacent concrete. 6. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1" in diameter by dry -pack method. Groove top of cracks and cut-out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and brush with neat cement grout coating or concrete bonding agent. Mix dry -pack, consisting of one part portland cement to 2 1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing. Compact dry -pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for not less than 72 hours. 7. Use epoxy -based mortar for structural repairs, where directed by the Engineer. 8. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of the Engineer. QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION: The Contractor shall employ a testing laboratory to perform all tests and to submit test reports_ Sampling and testing for quality control during the placement of concrete may include the following, as directed by the Engineer. 3A-18 93008 11 Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94. Slump: One test for each set of compressive strength test specimens taken at point of discharge. Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight concrete; ASTM C 231 pressure for normal weight concrete; one for each set of compressive strength test specimens. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F. and below, and when 80 degrees F. and above; and each time a set of compression test specimens made. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of 4 standard cylinders for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory cured test specimens except when field -cure test specimens are required. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each 100 cu. yds. or fraction thereof, of each concrete class placed in any one day or for each 5000 sq. ft. of surface area placed; 1 specimen tested at 7 days for information only, 2 specimens tested at 28 days, and 1 specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required. The acceptance test results shall be the average of the strengths of the two specimens tested at 28 days. When the frequency of testing will provide less than 5 strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than 5 are used. When the total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yds., the strength test may be waived by the Engineer if, in his judgment, adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided. When the strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 85% of companion laboratory -cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete. Test results will be reported in writing to the Engineer and the Contractor on the same day that tests are made. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in the structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials; compressive breaking strength and type of break for both 7 -day tests and 28 -day tests. 3A-19 93008 Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results indicate the specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by the Engineer. The testing service may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests conducted, and any other additional testing as may be required, when unacceptable concrete is verified. END OF SECTION 3A-20 • OTO SECTION 5A - STRUCTURAL STEEL PART I - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: The extent of structural steel work is shown on the Drawings, including schedules, notes and details to show size and location of members, typical connections and type of steel required. Structural steel is that work defined in the AISC "Code of Standard Practice" and as otherwise shown on the Drawings. RELATED WORD SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: Reinforcing steel and corrugated steel form - Section 3A QUALITY ASSURANCE: Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following except as otherwise indicated: 1. AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges". Paragraph 4.2.1 of the above code is hereby modified r by deletion of the following sentence: "This approval constitutes the Owner's acceptance of all responsibility for the design adequacy of any detail configuration of connections developed by the fabricator as a part of his preparation of these shop drawings." 2. AISC "Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings - Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design", Ninth Edition, and including the "Commentary" and supplements thereto as issued. 3. AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" approved by the Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering Foundation. 4. AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code". 5. ASTM A 6 "General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling and Bars for Structural Use". N � 5A-1 93008 Qualifications for Welding Work: 1. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with the AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure". 2. Provide certification that welders to be employed in the work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests within the previous 12 months. 3. If recertification of welders is required, retesting will be the Contractor's responsibility. Source Quality Control: 1. Materials and fabrication procedures are subject to inspection and tests in the mill, shop, and field, conducted by a qualified inspection agency. Such inspections and tests will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for providing materials and fabrication procedures in compliance with specified requirements. 2. Promptly remove and replace materials or fabricated components which do not comply. Design of Members and Connections: 1. All details shown are typical; similar details apply to similar conditions, unless otherwise indicated. Verify dimensions at the site whenever possible without causing delay in the work. 2. Promptly notify the Engineer whenever design of members and connections for any portion of the structure are not clearly indicated. SUBMITTALS• Shop Drawings, Structural Steel: 1. Submit shop drawings prepared under the supervision of a registered professional engineer including complete details and schedules for fabrication and shop assembly of members, and details, schedules, procedures and diagrams showing the sequence of erection. 2. Engineer's review of shop drawings will be for general considerations only. Compliance with requirements for materials fabrication and erection of structural steel is the Contractor's responsibility. 3. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, and show size, length, and type of each weld. 5A-2 93008 4. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for the installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages to be installed by others. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: Deliver materials to the site at such intervals to insure uninterrupted progress of the work. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast -in-place concrete, in ample time to not delay that work. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off the ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged. materials from erosion and deterioration. Do not store materials on the structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to the members or the supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. PART II - PRODUCTS MATERIALS- Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 36. Structural Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B, Fy = 46 ksi Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B or ASTM A 501 Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, nonheaded type unless otherwise indicated. Headed Stud Type Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grade 1015 or 1020, cold finished carbon steel; with dimensions complying with RISC Specifications. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, regular low -carbon steel bolts and nuts. Provide either hexagonal, or square, heads and nuts, except use only hexagonal units for exposed connections. High -Strength Threaded Fasteners: Heavy hexagon structural bolts, heavy hexagon nuts, and hardened washers, as follows: 1. Quenched and tempered medium -carbon steel bolts, nuts and washers, complying with ASTM A 325. . I 5A-3 a 93008 16 2. Concrete Expansion Anchors: Sleeve type anchors meeting Federal Specification FF -S-325 INT AMD 3, Group II, Type 3, Class 3 or wedge type anchors meeting Federal Specification FF -S-325 INT AMD 3, Group II, Type 4, Class 1. 3. Electrodes for Welding: Comply with AWS Code. 4. Structural Steel Primer Paint: Manufacturer's or Fabricator's standard, fast -curing, lead-free, "Universal" primer; selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with finish paint systems indicated and for capability to provide a sound foundation for field -applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure; complying with performance requirements for FS TT -P -645A. 5. Non -Metallic Non -Shrink Grout: Pre -mixed, non-metallic, non -corrosive, non -staining product containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water reducing agents, complying with CE CRD -C 621. 6. Provide non-metallic, non -shrink grout as manufactured by one of the following: a. Masterflow 713; Master Builders. b. Upcon; Upco Chem. Div., USM Corp. C. Sealtite 588; W.R. Meadows, Inc. FABRICATION• Shop Fabrication and Assembly: 1. Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in the shop to the greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on the final shop drawings. 2. Properly mark and match -mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence which will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials. 3. Where finishing is required, complete the assembly, including welding of units, before start of finishing operations. Provide finish surfaces on members exposed in the final structure free of markings, burrs, and other defects. Connections: 1. Weld or bolt shop connections, as indicated. 2. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections or other connections are indicated. 5A-4 93008 3. Provide high-strength threaded fasteners for all principal bolted connections, except where unfinished bolts are shown. 4. Provide unfinished threaded fasteners for only the bolted connections of secondary framing members to primary members (including framing members taking only nominal stress) and for temporary bracing to facilitate erection. 5. High -Strength Bolted Construction: Install high-strength threaded fasteners in accordance with AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts". Welded Construction: 1. Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods which will produce true alignment of axes without warp. Stud Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by the manufacturer of the stud connectors. Shop weld stud connectors, as shown, to bearing or embedded plates. Use automatic end welding of headed stud connectors in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. Holes for Other Work: 1. Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing, and for the passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on the final shop drawings. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing, and other specialty items as shown to receive other work. 2. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates. Splicing: Splicing of beams shall be as shown on the Drawings. All other splicing shall be made only with the written consent of the Engineer. When approved, copies of weld tests shall be furnished to the Engineer. SHOP PAINTING• General: 1. Shop paint all structural steel work, except those members or portions of members to be embedded in concrete or mortar. Paint embedded steel which is partially exposed on the exposed portions and the initial 2" of embedded areas only. 5A-5 93008 2. Do not paint surfaces which are to be welded or high-strength bolted with friction -type connections. 3. Apply 2 coats of paint to surfaces which are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from the first. 4. Surface Preparation: After inspection and before shipping, clean steelwork to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and splatter, slag or flux deposits. Clean steel in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) as follows: a. SP -2 "Hand Tool Cleaning", or b. SP -3 "Power Tool Cleaning", or C. SP -7 "Brush-off Blast Cleaning". 5. Painting: Immediately after surface preparation, apply structural steel primer paint in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and at a rate to provide a uniform dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. Use painting methods which will result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges and all exposed surfaces. PART III - EXECUTION INSPECTION• Erector must examine the areas and conditions under which structural steel work is to be installed, and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Erector. ERECTION• General: Comply with the AISC Specifications and Code of Standard Practice, and as herein specified. Temporary Shoring and Bracing: Provide temporary shoring and bracing members with connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. Remove temporary members and connections when permanent members are in place and final connections are made. Provide temporary guy lines to achieve proper alignment of the structures as erection proceeds. Temporary Planking: Provide temporary planking and working platforms as necessary to effectively complete the work. 5A-6 93008 Anchor Bolts: Furnish anchor bolts and other connectors required for securing structural steel to foundations and other in-place work. Furnish templates and other devices as necessary for presetting bolts and other anchors to accurate locations. Setting Bases and Bearing Plates: 1. Clean concrete bearing surfaces of bond -reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean the bottom surface of base and bearing plates. 2. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members on wedges or other adjusting devices. 3. Tighten the anchor bolts after the supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with the edge of the base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout. 4. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or plates to ensure that no voids remain. Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure in strict compliance with the manufacturer's instructions, or as otherwise required. Field Assembly: 1. Set structural frames accurately to the lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust the various members forming a part of a complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces which will be in permanent contact before assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 2. Level and plumb individual members of the structure within specified RISC tolerances. 3. Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on the mean operating temperature of the structure. Make allowances for the difference between temperature at time of erection and the mean temperature at which the structure will be when completed and in service. 4. Splice members only where shown or specified. 5. Erection Bolts: On exposed welded construction, remove erection bolts, fill holes with plug welds and grind smooth at exposed surfaces. 5A-7 93008 6. Comply with AISC Specifications: For bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and the removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 7. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by the use of drift pins, except in secondary bracing members. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. 8. Gas -Cutting: Do not use gas cutting torches in the field for correcting fabrication errors in the structural framing. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members which are not under stress, as acceptable to the Engineer. Finish gas -cut sections equal to a sheared appearance when permitted. i 9. Touch -Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of the shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: Engage an independent testing and inspection agency to inspect high-strength bolted connections and welded connections and to perform tests and prepare test reports. The testing agency shall conduct and interpret the tests and state in each report whether the test specimens comply with the requirements, and specifically state any deviations therefrom. Correct deficiencies in structural steel work which inspections and laboratory test reports have indicated to be not in compliance with requirements. Perform additional tests, at Contractor's expense, as may be necessary to reconfirm any noncompliance of the original work, and as may be necessary to show compliance of corrected work. Field Bolted Connections: Inspect in accordance with AISC specifications. Field Welding: Inspect and test during erection of structural steel as follows: 1. Certify welders and conduct inspections and tests as required. Record types and locations of defects found in the work. Record work required and performed to correct deficiencies. 2. Perform visual inspection of all welds. Perform tests of welds as follows: 1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 5A-8 93008 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 109; performed on the root pass and on the finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration not acceptable. 3. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94 and ASTM E 142; minimum quality level 112-2T". 4. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. END OF SECTION 5A-9 SECTION 15A - SITE UTILITIES PART I - GENERAL NOTE: Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. SUBMITTALS• Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. SCOPE: Perform all layout, trenching, excavation, backfill, shoring and similar work and provide and install all -materials and appurtenances necessary for the installation and final connection of all utilities. EXISTING UTILITIES: Prior to beginning work, manually locate and stake all utility lines existing at the site. The Contractor shall not rely solely on the scale drawings in determining the scope of the work. The drawings are not certified surveys and are not guaranteed for accuracy of location or elevation of existing lines or completeness. Before bidding, each bidder shall by personal examination of the project satisfy himself as to the existing conditions which prevail. Reasonable differences in actual jobsite dimensions and the drawings shall not be considered justification for a change in the contract sum. Interruptions: Conduct operations to minimize service outages. When interruption is unavoidable, schedule the interruption in consultation with the Engineer and Owner to occur at a time of least demand for the utility. Notify the Owner of requested interruption time at least 24 hours in advance of outage. Disconnections: Provide where indicated on the drawings. Where not so indicated provide disconnections at appropriate locations as selected by the Contractor to facilitate his work. Cap terminal. ends of active utility branches. 15A-1 93008 Utilities to Remain: Protect from damage due to construction operations. Repair or replace portions so damaged as directed by the Engineer. PART II - PRODUCTS MATERIALS• All piping materials for every purpose shall be furnished and installed as hereinafter specified. All pipe and fittings shall be new and unused unless specifically indicated otherwise. Underground steel piping shall be cleaned and primed with Humble "Rust -Ban" and wrapped with a double thickness of 3M Scotch 1151" vinyl tape over pipe and fittings. Factory coated pipe "X -Tru -Goat" or epoxy coated pipe with wrapped fittings will be considered equal. PART III - EXECUTION EXCAVATION, GRADING AND SITE WORK: Furnish all necessary equipment, labor and materials and complete all excavation, backfill and finish grading for the work. Cut and remove all concrete or other structures necessary for the installation of the work. All excavations shall be carried down to the depth required for walls, piers, underpinning, slabs and pits, etc. as shown on drawings. Where forms are required, excavation shall be wide enough to permit the construction and removal of the forms. All excavations shall be made in compliance with OSHA and the State of Texas requirements. Site Work; Order of Procedure: Before proceeding with any work which will interfere with the normal operation of utilities, traffic, etc., the Contractor shall schedule such work with the Owner through the Engineer, and provide all temporary barricades and protection measures necessary to afford safety to the public and the minimum of utility interruption. General Protective Provisions: Where construction provisions require openings to be cut into existing structures or utilities, the work shall not be started until the Contractor has made all necessary provisions for protection against weather and other conditions which might affect the Owner's property and operations and only then upon approval of the Engineer. 15A-2 d 93008 Trees: All trees that are adjacent to the construction areas, and that are subject to damage during construction operations shall be protected with wood barricades as directed by the Engineer. Removal of Existing Structures: The Contractor shall remove, as directed, all existing curbs, walls, pavements and structures as required for the installation of new work under this contract. All debris from these operations shall be removed from the site immediately and disposed of by the Contractor. Excavation; General: Excavations shall be of sufficient size and depth to permit access to structures and repair of same. All cuts shall be smooth and straight and shall be left clear of all debris. The Contractor shall verify, establish, and maintain all general lines and levels. Any errors or inconsistencies shall be reported to the Engineer before commencing work. Excavations for slabs that are poured on the ground shall be carried to the proper depth to accommodate the thickness required by the drawings. Opening and Reclosing Pavement: Where excavation requires the opening of existing walks, streets, drives or other existing pavement, that pavement shall be cut as required to install new lines and to make new connections to existing lines. The size of the cut shall be held to a minimum consistent with the work to be accomplished. After the installation of the new work is completed and the excavation has been backfilled, the paving shall be patched, using materials to match those cut out. The patches shall thoroughly bond with the original surface and shall be level with them. The patched surface shall be in a condition equal to or better than the adjacent paving. Provide a 6" thick reinforced concrete protective slab 4' 0' wider than the ditch under the patch. All such work shall be done under the direction of the owner of the pavement and to his complete satisfaction. Water in Excavation: The Contractor shall keep all excavations dry by diverting or pumping seepage or surface water from excavations. Provide pumps and appurtenances, if necessary, to effect this condition. Blasting: No blasting will be allowed. Stock Piles: Soil from excavation operations that is satisfactory to the Engineer for backfill and finish grading may be stock -piled at the site. Such stock -piling shall be limited to the amount which can be located immediately adjacent to the excavations. All surplus material shall be deposited elsewhere in a location designated by the Owner's Representative. 15A-3 93008 Bracings and Shorings: The Contractor shall do all bracing and shoring necessary to support adjoining pavement or structures or retain earth banks and prevent caving in and displacement of adjacent soil, furnishing all necessary timbers, cribbing, planking or sheet piling for that purpose. All bracing shall be subject to the approval of the State of Texas or OSHA requirements and shall be removed from the site when so directed by him. Bracing shall in no case be placed in such a manner as to thrust against any portion of a building. Backfill: All backfill and finish grading shall be accomplished with topsoil. In the event site materials are insufficient to complete this operation, the Contractor will provide topsoil from an off-site source. All backfill will be placed in 6-8 inch layers and puddled to settle thoroughly. Care shall be exercised to protect waterproofing during placing. Under sidewalks, curbs and gutters and drives, the backfill shall be tamped to 95% of original compaction. Finish Grading: After the backfill has been finally settled, the Contractor shall spread a suitable loam over the entire area and dress the surface to meet existing grades. On completion, the finish grades shall meet the tops of curbs and sidewalks, drain surface water away from the building, and present a clean raked appearance, free of washes, linkages, and debris. Compacted areas shall be tilled, harrowed and graded and made ready for seeding. Limits of Operation: Contractor's access to the work will be limited to the areas shown on the drawings and within 15 feet on either side of ditches which are opened. Open excavations shall be continuously barricaded and lighted in such manner that access to the construction by handicapped persons is impossible. Review these requirements with the Owner's Representative before beginning any construction. TOPSOIL• Strip topsoil to whatever depths encountered, in such manner so as to prevent intermingling with the underlying subsoil or other objectionable material. Remove heavy growths of grass from areas before stripping. Topsoil is defined as Amarillo fine sandy loam soil found in a depth no greater than 18". Satisfactory topsoil is reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones, and other objects over 3/4" in diameter, and without weeds, roots, and other objectionable material. Where trees are indicated to be left standing, stop topsoil stripping a sufficient distance from such trees to prevent damage to the main root system. 15A-4 93008 Stockpile topsoil in storage piles within limits of construction and separate from other excavated materials. Construct storage piles to freely drain surface water. All fill material to be used around the perimeter of the building in areas to receive landscaping shall be topsoil and shall be hand raked to finish grade and ready for seeding. PROTECTION OF WORK, PROPERTY AND SERVICES OF OWNER: The Contractor shall take precaution to protect existing facilities and features within the designated construction limits and along the access to the construction site. The Contractor shall maintain adequate protection of the project from damage and protect the Owner's property from injury or loss arising from activities conducted in connection with the Project. The Contractor shall under all circumstances make good any such damage, injury or loss. Under no circumstances shall the Contractor use, interrupt, dismember, diminish or discontinue any service of the Owner unless written permission to do so has been secured in advance from the Engineer. In the conduct of the work of this Project, the Contractor shall exercise care to protect the Owner's drives, walks, trees and shrubs. Any damage done to walks and drives shall be repaired by the Contractor in a manner which meets the approval of the Owner's duly appointed representative. Particular care shall be exercised in protecting trees. If in the judgement of the Engineer, circumstances warrant such an action, the Contractor shall construct protective enclosures for trees. If limbs must be cut from trees they shall be cut only by tree surgeons designated by the Owner. If shrubbery interferes with the progress of the work, the Owner shall be duly notified. If, in the judgement of the Owner, the shrubbery needs to be preserved, it will be removed by the owner's staff. If the shrubbery is not to be preserved, it shall be removed by the Contractor. Great care shall be exercised at all times in order that the Owner's equipment or services may not be jeopardized by cutting, excavating, fitting, digging or patching conducted by the Contractor. when the whole or a portion of the project is suspended, the Contractor shall protect with care such parts of the Project liable to sustain injury. The Contractor shall protect existing trees and other vegetation indicated to remain in place, against unnecessary cutting, breaking or skinning of roots, skinning and bruising of bark, smothering of 15A-5 93008 trees by stockpiling construction materials or excavated materials within drip line, excess foot or vehicular traffic, or parking of vehicles within drip line. The Contractor shall provide temporary fences, barricades or guards as required to protect trees and vegetation to be left standing. The Contractor shall water trees and other vegetation which are to remain within the limits of the construction area as required to maintain their health during the course of construction operations. All damage to existing trees on Texas Tech property will be evaluated by the Director of Grounds Maintenance using the International Shade Tree Conference Standards and charges will be assessed the Contractor for damage to trees incurred during the construction process. The formula to be used is as follows: Measurement of a cross section of the trunk of the damaged tree will be made at a point 2 ft. above existing ground level to determine square inches of the cross section. Assessment for damage will be $11 per square inch. The Contractor shall protect all portions of the underground sprinkler system located within the designated limits of construction area. Any damage incurred to the system shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor as directed by the University Representative at the Contractor's expense. REMOVAL OF DEBRIS AND WEED CONTROL: The Contractor shall keep the streets and construction area free of rubbish and debris and all weeds within the limits of the construction area shall be kept to a height of no more than 12" to comply with the City Code and with environmental safety regulations. PARKING• The Contractor shall maintain parking facilities for construction personnel within the limits of the construction area. DISP©SAL OF WASTE MATERIALS: The Contractor shall remove all combustible and non-combustible waste materials completely from the Owner's property and legally dispose of same. Burning of any materials will not be permitted within the boundaries of the Owner's property. 15A-6 93008 CONSTRUCTION FENCE: The Contractor at his own expense shall erect and maintain a construction fence at the location designated on the plans outlining the construction limits. This fence shall be chain link or woven wire erected to a minimum height of 610" to physically limit and retard pedestrian access. The Construction shall not be dismantled until such time as the work has been accepted and the Contractor vacates the premises. END OF SECTION 15A-7 93008 SECTION 15B - PIPING AND ACCESSORIES PART I - GENERAL NOTE: Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. SUBMITTALS• Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. SCOPE: This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the piping and accessories as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. INSPECTION: All pipe, valves, fittings, and other accessories shall be inspected upon delivery and during the course of the work. Any defective materials found during field inspection or during hydrostatic and leakage tests shall be removed from the site of the work and replaced by the Contractor. Protection During Storage: The interior of all pipe, fittings, and other accessories shall be kept free from dirt and foreign matter at all times. Valves and fittings shall be drained and stored in a manner that will protect them from damage by freezing. PART II - PRODUCTS 15B-1 1 93008 MATERIALS• All materials shall be manufactured or fabricated in the United States of America. Materials shall conform to the listed standards. Refer to specific sections for materials to be used under that section. The following tabulation is for reference only to identify the applicable standard. Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings ASTM A74, Class SV Push On Gaskets for C.I. Soil Pipe ASTM C564 No Hub Joints ASTM D3183 Copper Tubing ASTM B75-76 Wrought Copper Solder Fittings ANSI B16.22 Cast Bronze Solder Fittings ANSI B16.18 15B-1 1 93008 Steel Pipe ASTM A120, A53, A106 Butt Weld Fittings ANSI B16.9 Socket Weld Fittings ANSI B16.11 Steel Flanges ANSI B16.5 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings ANSI 816.3 Flange Bolt, Sets ASME Pressure Piping Unions in Ferrous Lines: 150 pound malleable iron, screwed pattern, ground joint with brass to iron seat; equal to Crane. Insulating Fittings: Equal to Maloney. Unions in Copper or Brass Lines: 125 pound all brass, screwed pattern, ground joint, equal to Chase, Crane or Mueller. Mechanical Couplings: Victaulic Style 77 Gaskets in Steam and Condensate Return Lines: Equal to TOPOG-E molded rubber gaskets. PREINSULATED PIPING: Preinsulated Hot/Chilled Water Piping may be used in the City of Lubbock tunnel and in the coliseum at the contractor's option in lieu of steel piping with field applied insulation. All hot/chilled water lines may be preinsulated prefabricated piping, RTRP "VEE -rite" 250, as manufactured by Thermal Pipe Systems, Inc. Approved equal piping by Insul Pipe or Thermacore will be considered. Each section is factory fabricated of straight standard 20 foot lengths of reinforced thermosetting resin plastic (RTRP) pipe with special couplings. Shop drawings illustrating the construction and assembly details are attached herein for the Contractor's information. Submit drawings for all field joints. A representative of the manufacturer shall be present during critical periods of installation and testing to verify that the installation is being made in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. One pipe end consists of a male EPDM seal and the other end consists of a female PVC casing. A grooved RTRP coupling in the male end has "O" ring seals for joining the RTRP pipe joints. The outer jacket is PVC tubing with polyurethane foam insulation. Field connections to the preinsulated pipe sections shall be made using standard RTRP Bell and Spigot fittings assembled with adhesive to meet system requirements. Enclose the joints in a jacket made of PVC tubing sections to match the preinsulated sections. Foam polyurethane insulation into the void between the fittings and the jacket. Use special fitting where connections are made to copper tubing, ferrous piping and equipment. 15B-2 93008 MW 19 IFA VALVES: General Service Valves: 3" and smaller, all bronze, screwed; 3-1/2" and larger, flanged, iron body, bronze trimmed, equal to the following Crane Nos: Type Gate 3" and smaller Gate 3-1/211 and larger Globe 3" and smaller Globe 3-1/2" and larger Angle 3" and smaller Angle 3-1/2" and larger Fluid Pressure Below 125 PSIG 428 465-1/2 1 351 2 353 Fluid Pressure Above 125 PSIG 424 7-1/2 E 14-1/2 P 21E 16-1/2 P 23E Where valves have discs, select the discs for the intended service using materials as recommended by the valve manufacturer. Provide extended stems for valves in insulated lines, so that the handle clears the insulation and jacket. Acceptable General Service Valve Manufacturers: Stockham, Jenkins, OIC, Walworth, Hammond. Swing Check Valves 2" and Smaller: All bronze screwed, equal to Crane No. 37 for pressures to 125 psi or No. 36 for pressures to 200 psi SWP or 400 PSI WOG.. Swing Check Valves 2-1/2" and Larger: Iron body, flanged, bronze trimmed; equal to Crane No. 373 for pressures to 125 psi or No. 39E for pressures from 125 psi to 250 psi. Butterfly Valves: Cast or ductile iron body, flanged or with drilled and tapped lugs, bronze discs, stainless steel shafts with bronze bushings, resilient EPDM seats and O -rings, "Bubble Tight" shut-off at 150 psi pressure. On valves 4" and smaller, handle shall be infinite position with memory stops. On valves 6" and larger, provide geared operators. Norris, Keystone, Center Line, Demco or Crane valves are acceptable. Where valves are installed in insulated lines, provide extended stems so that the handle will clear the insulation and jacket. Trunnion Valves: Posi-Seal trunnion valve with 150 PSIG flanges, carbon steel valve with nickel plated body and disc, teflon packing, teflon seal, Buna O-ring, 316 stainless steel bearings and with a gear driven operator. Furnish these valves with pneumatic actuators for the Texas Tech University chilled water system access to Municipal Coliseum. 93048 15B-3 Ball Valves: Bronze threaded body, chrome plated full port bronze ball, teflon seats and O -rings, bronze shafts, and infinite position handle with memory stops. Memory stops may be deleted for domestic water service. Valve shall be three piece break away for in --line service. Apollo, Crane, Jamesbury and Stockham are acceptable. Ring type two piece ball valves are not acceptable, except for drain line service. Where valves are installed in insulated lines, provide extended stems to clear the insulation and jacket. EXPANSION JOINTS: Furnish and install as shown on the drawings, equalizing expansion joints as manufactured by Zallea Brothers or Adsco. Joints shall have flanged ends unless otherwise noted. The bellows be hydraulically formed from an Inconel metal tube having only longitudinal seams. The weld bead of the seam, without grinding, shall be the same thickness as the parent metal. Where required, the bellows shall be annealed and/or stress relieved in furnaces automatically controlled by a recording Potentiometer. Before assembly, the corrugated bellow must be pickled to remove all scale formed by annealing and passivated to provide the maximum corrosion resistance. All lines in which expansion joints are installed must be securely anchored and guided in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. Internal Inconel sleeves shall be required on all steam joints. The sleeves shall be suitable for reverse flow. Expansion joints for installation in steam lines shall be self equalizing expansion joints with equalizing rings and internal guides and suitable for 150 prig working pressure. Expansion joints for installation in pumped return lines shall be self equalizing joints suitable for 100 psig working pressure. Expansion joints for installation in chilled water lines shall be. self equalizing joints suitable for 100 prig working pressure. The joints shall be shipped compressed for installation at 80 degrees F. and shall be securely fastened and labeled. 15B-4 93008 GAUGE COCKS AND GAUGES: Where gauge connections are installed in insulated lines, install a ConBraCo No. 41-380 T --handle gauge cock on a nipple of sufficient length that the cock handle will be free of the pipe insulation, and position each cock in relation to surrounding piping and equipment so that the gauge may be easily read, and so that a gauge having a 6" diameter dial can be screwed into and out of the cock. S Install gauge cocks at pumps as close to pump suction and discharge connections as possible. Where drilled and tapped gauge connections are provided in the pump casing by the manufacturer, use these tappings. Pressure Gauges: Phosphor bronze, seamless Bourdon spring type with phosphor bronze bushed rotary movement and link; 4-1/2" dial, nickel plated ring, free standing cast aluminum case, equipped with micrometer adjustment pointer. Furnish each gauge with scale range suitable for the duty. Water Pressure q : Gau esEqual to Weksler No. BA14-I with cast 9 aluminum case, or EA -14 with stainless steel case; Weksler, Weiss, and Trerice acceptable. Steam Pressure Gauges: Equal to Weksler No. BA14-I with cast aluminum case, mounted on coiled pipe (pigtail) siphons; Weksler, Weiss, Trerice acceptable. THERMOMETER WELLS: Furnish and install brass or stainless steel closed separable thermometer wells for all thermometer and controller bulbs which are designated for liquid measurements. Whenever a thermometer or controller bulb is inserted in a pipe for either remote or local temperature indication or control, locate the thermometer well so that it will be completely surrounded by flowing fluid. Such thermometer locations as shown on the drawings are diagrammatic only -install thermometer wells for maximum effectiveness and in the case of locally indicating instruments, for easy readability. Test Wells: Test wells for use with etched stem thermometers shall be Bolton No. 615 brass, with a threaded brass plug and keeper chain. Install these test wells so that they can be filled with oil to facilitate temperature measurements. 15B-5 93008 MERCURIAL THERMOMETERS: Industrial type with Cycolac plastic cases, glass fronts, 9" scale, adjustable straight or angle pattern as required for ready readability. Furnish thermometers with 2-1/2" stem extensions where they are installed in insulated lines. Select scale ranges for maximum readability at the design temperature of the medium being measured. Thermometer equal to Weksler No. AA5H9. Acceptable Manufacturers: Weksler, Trerice, Weiss, Moeller. COMBINATION PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE PORT: Furnish and install where indicated "Pete's Plug" a 1/4" MPT fitting to receive either a temperature or pressure probe 1/8" OD. Fitting shall be solid brass with valve core of neoprene fitted with cap with gasket. Furnish an extended stem as required to extend through pipe insulation where installed in insulated lines. PART III - EXECUTION INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS: Install runs of piping essentially as indicated on the drawings and/or as required. The location, direction and size of the various lines are indicated on the drawings. Make up all systems straight and true and properly graded for correct flow of contained materials and to provide drainage. Cut pipes accurately to measurements established at the building and work into place without forcing or springing. Except as required for specified grading, run all piping above ground parallel with the lines of the building. Make all changes in pipe sizes with reducing fittings. Use no long screws or bushings. Install and support piping systems with loops, bends, expansion joints and/or flexible connectors as required for flexibility, to accommodate expansion and contraction of piping due to temperature changes in the contained fluids and in the surrounding space, and to minimize the transmission of vibration to the building structure. Provide unions in the lines assembled with screwed and soldered fittings, at points of connection to equipment, and elsewhere as indicated or required to permit proper connections to be made, or to permit valves, equipment items, etc. to be removed. Provide unions also in welded lines at connections to equipment where flanges are not provided. Provide insulating unions where ferrous material joins non-ferrous material. 15B-6 93008 U_I J In piping systems assembled by welding, use factory -fabricated weldincr fittings of the same material and the same schedule or 14 In general, use listed materials in fabricating the various piping systems. The method of assembly may be varied only to meet special conditions where it is impossible to comply with the specified method of joining piping. Where special classes of piping are involved and are not listed, request exact instructions as to the class of material involved and the method of fabricating it before ordering materials. FLOW MEASURING DEVICES: Provide and install at the location indicated on the drawings primary flow sensors. Sensors shall be Annubar Type FLO-TAP DMT instrument as manufactured by Dieterich Standard Corporation. Sensor shall be 316SS and shall be selected for the particular application specified. Each device shall be complete with mounting coupling, mounting hardware, valves and instrument connections. Instruments shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Accuracy of the instrument shall be within 1% of flow with 0.1% repeatability. Provide a permanent metal identification tag attached to each instrument. Nameplates shall indicate design GPM flow rate. Provide one wall mount Eagle Eye model EFW flow meter, including + tubing, a complete set of direct reading scales, filter, and heat seal valve. Meter shall be 6" scale with dampener, bleed valves, zero adjustment, and equalizing valves. All wetted parts shall be stainless steel. Accuracy of the meter shall be 1.5% of flow. Provide and install a DART Flow Computer as manufactured by Dietrich Standard Corporation. It shall receive input from the flow meter through two 1151 differental pressure transmitters and transmit identical 4 to 20 MA signals to remote digital flow (GPM) displays in Control Panels in the Texas Tech University CHACP #1 and City of Lubbock Coliseum Operating Engineer's Office. The Temperature Regulation Subcontractor will also provide input from temperature sensors in the chilled water supply and return piping and transmit identical 4 to 20 MA signals to remote digital temperature (°F) displays on both Control Panels. 15B-7 93008 weight as the piping in which they are installed, except that branches or take -offs of sizes not exceeding 2/3 of the nominal diameter of the mains may be made with Bonney Weldolets or Thredolets. Mitering of runs to form tees, and pipe to any similar form elbows, notching of straight construction will not be permitted. 14 In general, use listed materials in fabricating the various piping systems. The method of assembly may be varied only to meet special conditions where it is impossible to comply with the specified method of joining piping. Where special classes of piping are involved and are not listed, request exact instructions as to the class of material involved and the method of fabricating it before ordering materials. FLOW MEASURING DEVICES: Provide and install at the location indicated on the drawings primary flow sensors. Sensors shall be Annubar Type FLO-TAP DMT instrument as manufactured by Dieterich Standard Corporation. Sensor shall be 316SS and shall be selected for the particular application specified. Each device shall be complete with mounting coupling, mounting hardware, valves and instrument connections. Instruments shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Accuracy of the instrument shall be within 1% of flow with 0.1% repeatability. Provide a permanent metal identification tag attached to each instrument. Nameplates shall indicate design GPM flow rate. Provide one wall mount Eagle Eye model EFW flow meter, including + tubing, a complete set of direct reading scales, filter, and heat seal valve. Meter shall be 6" scale with dampener, bleed valves, zero adjustment, and equalizing valves. All wetted parts shall be stainless steel. Accuracy of the meter shall be 1.5% of flow. Provide and install a DART Flow Computer as manufactured by Dietrich Standard Corporation. It shall receive input from the flow meter through two 1151 differental pressure transmitters and transmit identical 4 to 20 MA signals to remote digital flow (GPM) displays in Control Panels in the Texas Tech University CHACP #1 and City of Lubbock Coliseum Operating Engineer's Office. The Temperature Regulation Subcontractor will also provide input from temperature sensors in the chilled water supply and return piping and transmit identical 4 to 20 MA signals to remote digital temperature (°F) displays on both Control Panels. 15B-7 93008 FABRICATION OF PIPE JOINTS: Push -on Pipe: The inside of the bell and the outside of the spigot shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove oil, grit, excess coating, and other foreign matter. The circular rubber gasket shall be flexed inward and inserted in the gasket recess of the bell socket. A thin film of gasket lubricant shall be applied to either the inside surface of the gasket or the spigot end of the pipe or both. Gasket lubricant shall be as supplied by the pipe manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. The spigot end of the pipe shall be entered into the socket with care used to keep the joint from contacting the ground. The joint shall then be completed by forcing the plain end to the bottom of the socket with a forked tool or jack type tool or other device. Pipe that is not furnished with a depth mark shall be marked before assembly to assure that the spigot end is inserted to the full depth of the joint. Field cut pipe lengths shall be filed or ground to resemble the spigot end of such pipe as manufactured. Complete assembly instructions from the pipe manufacturer shall be followed. Threaded Pipes: Ream and deburr pipe after it is cut and before it is threaded. Stand each pipe on one end and hammer to remove all foreign material. Full cut threads, but not more than 3 pipe threads shall remain exposed when joint is completed. Make up joints with graphite and oil or an approved graphite compound applied to male threads only. Caulking of threaded joints to stop or prevent leaks is prohibited. Copper Tubing: Cut tubing square and deburr. Clean insides of fittings and outsides of tubing with sand cloth before assembly. Exercise care to prevent annealing of fittings and hard drawn tubing. Make all joints with solid string or wire solder, using non -corrosive paste flux of the proper type for each application. No cored solder will be permitted. Use 95-5 solder (95% tin, 5% antimony) or Silvabrite 100 solder (95.5% tin, 4% copper, .5% silver composition) for all copper tubing. Under no circumstances will solder with any lead content be permitted on the jobsite. Welded Joints: Make all welded joints by the metallic arc process. Use base material conforming to ANSI B31.1 for welded pipe ASTM A106 and ASTM A53. Use filler material conforming to ASTM A233 and in accordance with ANSI B31.1. Machine the ends of the material to be joined or gas cut. Make the cut smooth in order that good fit can be made and a full penetration weld made. Use direct current for welding with the electrode positive. Limit the depth of deposit to is assembled with screwed and soldered fittings, at points of connection to equipment, and elsewhere as indicated or required to permit proper connections to be made, or to permit valves, equipment items, etc. to be removed. Provide unions also 15B-8 93008 in welded lines at connections to equipment where flanges are not provided. Provide insulating unions where ferrous material joins non-ferrous material. In piping systems assembled by welding, use factory -fabricated welding fittings of the same material and the same schedule or weight as the piping in which they are installed, except that branches or take -offs of sizes not exceeding 2/3 of the nominal diameter of the mains may be made with Bonney Weldolets or Thredolets. Mitering of pipe to form elbows, notching of straight runs to form tees, and any similar construction will not be permitted. in general, use listed materials in fabricating the various piping systems. The method of assembly may be varied only to meet special conditions where it is impossible to comply with the specified method of joining piping. Where special classes of piping are involved and are not listed, request exact instructions as to the class of material involved and the method of fabricating it before ordering materials. FLOW MEASURING DEVICES: Provide and install at the location indicated on the drawings primary flow sensors. Sensors shall be Annubar Type FLO-TAP DMT instrument as manufactured by Dieterich Standard Corporation. Sensor shall be 316SS and shall be selected for the particular application specified. Each device shall be complete with mounting coupling, mounting hardware, valves and instrument connections. Instruments shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Accuracy of the instrument shall be within 1% of flow with 0.1% repeatability. Provide a permanent metal identification tag attached to each instrument. Nameplates shall indicate design GPM flow rate. Provide one portable Eagle Eye model 77C flow meter in a portable case, including tubing, a complete set of direct reading scales, filter, and heat seal valve. Meter shall be 6" scale with dampener, zero adjustment, bleed valves, and equalizing valves. All wetted parts shall be stainless steel. Accuracy of the meter shall be 1.5% of flow. Provide and install a DART Flow Computer as manufactured by Dietrich Standard Corporation. It shall receive input from the flow meter and transmit identical 4 to 20 MA signals to remote digital flow (GPM) displays in Control Panels in the Texas Tech University CHACP #1 and City of Lubbock Coliseum Operating Engineer's Office. The Flow Computer shall also receive input from 15B-9 93008 Bmperature sensors in the and transmit identical 4 temperature (°F) displays chilled water supply and return piping to 20 MA signals to remote digital on both Control Panels. FABRICATION OF PIPE JOINTS: Push -On Pipe: The inside of the bell and the outside of the spigot shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove oil, grit, excess coating, and other foreign matter. The circular rubber gasket shall be flexed inward and inserted in the gasket recess of the bell socket. A thin film of gasket lubricant shall be applied to either the inside surface of the gasket or the spigot end of the pipe or both. Gasket lubricant shall be as supplied by the pipe manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. The spigot end of the pipe shall be entered into the socket with care used to keep the joint from contacting the ground. The joint shall then be completed by forcing the plain end to the bottom of the socket with a forked tool or jack type tool or other device. Pipe that is not furnished with a depth mark shall be marked before assembly to assure that the spigot end is inserted to the full depth of the joint. Field cut pipe lengths shall be filed or ground to resemble the spigot end of such pipe as manufactured. Complete assembly instructions from the pipe manufacturer shall be followed. Threaded. Pipes: Ream and deburr pipe after it is cut and before it is threaded. Stand each pipe on one end and hammer to remove all foreign material. Full cut threads, but not more than 3 pipe threads shall remain exposed when joint is completed. Make up joints with graphite and oil or an approved graphite compound applied to male threads only. Caulking of threaded joints to stop or prevent leaks is prohibited. Copper Tubing: Cut tubing square and deburr. Clean insides of fittings and outsides of tubing with sand cloth before assembly. Exercise care to prevent annealing of fittings and hard drawn tubing. Make all joints with solid string or wire solder, using non -corrosive paste flux of the proper type for each application. No cored solder will be permitted. Use 95-5 solder (95% tin, 5% antimony) or Silvabrite 100 solder (95.5% tin, 4% copper, .5% silver composition) for all copper tubing. Under no circumstances will solder with any lead content be permitted on the jobsite. Welded Joints: Make all welded joints by the metallic arc process. Use base material conforming to ANSI B31.1 END OF SECTION 15B-10 93008 ISECTION 15C - PLUMBING SYSTEMS PART I - GENERAL NOTE: Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. or SUBMITTALS: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. SCOPE: This section of the specifications requires the furnishing and installation of all equipment, labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of the plumbing systems. PART II - PRODUCTS MATERIALS: Refer to Section "Piping and Accessories". Sump Pump Discharge Pipe: Standard weight galvanized steel assembled using screwed fittings until they turn down and discharge into janitor's sink or into gravity flow line. Domestic Water Lines (Cold): All water lines underground or under slabs on grade shall be of Type K hard drawn copper tubing. All interior water lines shall be Type L hard drawn copper tubing. Where connections are made between copper tubing and cast iron V4 pipe, use adapters. Copper tubing shall be assembled using solder -joint fittings. No lead solder will be permitted. All flanges shall be 150 psig rated. Drain Lines: Type L copper with solder joint fittings. 93008 lb END OF SECTION 15C-1 SECTION 15D - STEAM AND CONDENSATE RETURN SYSTEM PART I - GENERAL NOTE• Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. SUBMITTALS Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. SCOPE: This section of the specification pertains to the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment, fixtures, trim, services, and accessories necessary and incidental to the steam and condensate return systems specified herein and/or on the drawings. PART II - PRODUCTS MATERIALS: Refer to Section "Piping and Accessories". Steam Lines and Steam Vent Lines: Schedule 40 black steel pipe. Lines 2-1/2" and larger shall be assembled by welding with welded fittings. At the Contractor's option, lines 2" and smaller may be welded or may be assembled with 125 pound banded pattern malleable iron screwed fittings. Steel piping shall be seamless, ASTM Designation: A -106 -GRADE B or A-53-ERW or API -5L. High Pressure Steam Lines and Pumped Condensate Return: Schedule 40 black steel pipe, seamless or electric resistance welded. Lines 1-1/2" and larger shall be assembled by welding with Schedule 40 welded fittings. At the Contractor's option, lines 1" and smaller may be welded with schedule 40 socket welding fittings or assembled with 250# malleable iron screwed fittings. Steel piping shall be seamless, ASTM Designation: A 1 -106 -GRADE B or A-53-ERW or API -5L. All new pipe provided for high pressure steam lines and condensate return lines shall be Schedule 40, seamless steel pipe as manufactured by National Tube Co. Welded pipe that meets AP1 specifications for 150 psig. 400 degrees F service may be substituted. 15D-1 93008 Such seamless pipe shall conform to Standard Specifications for SEAMLESS CARBON -STEEL PIPE FOR HIGH TEMPERATURE SERVICE, A.S.T.M. Designation: A -106-52T. All required supplies shall be cut from pipe of the specifications indicated above. Contractor may field fabricate reducers and off -sets in lines less than 20 degree change in direction. On all tees and changes in direction greater than 20 degrees, standard welding fittings shall be used. Field fabricated sections shall be fabricated from piping as specified. Pumped Return Lines: Schedule 80 black steel pipe. Lines 2-1/2" and larger shall be assembled by welding with welding fittings. At the Contractor's option, lines 2" and smaller may be welded or may be assembled with 125 pound cast iron screwed fittings. Steel piping shall be seamless, A -106 -GRADE B or may be electric resistance welded, A-53-ERW or API -5L. Flanges: Flanged joints in high pressure steam piping systems shall be used only where the installation of flanged fittings or appurtenances make their use necessary and at such points at which they are specifically shown on the plans. All flanges required for high pressure steam lines shall be Tube -Turn Part No. 30 150 pound welding neck flanges. All flanges for high pressure steam service shall be dimensioned, faced, drilled and spot faced to conform to the 150 pound American Standard for Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings (B16e-1939). Gaskets: Gaskets shall be placed between the flanges of all high pressure steam or return line flanged joints. Such gaskets shall be ring form gaskets fitting within the bolt circle of their respective flanges. Gaskets for high pressure steam line joints shall be TOPOG-E molded rubber. Studs, Bolts and Nuts: All flanged joints fabricated in high pressure steam lines shall be fabricated by the use of carbon steel bolt -studs. The physical and chemical properties, workmanship and finish of such bolt -studs shall conform to Tentative Specifications for ALLOY -STEEL BOLTING MATERIALS FOR HIGH TEMPERATURE SERVICE, A.S.T.M. Designation A -193-46T Class BB. Unions: All unions used in high pressure steam lines shall be 150 pound malleable iron female unions, brass to iron seat, Grinnell Fig 571. Valves: 1. Gate Valve: 150 lb., O S & Y cast steel, flexible wedge type, bolted bonnet, flanged, Crane 47XU-F, sizes 2" and larger. Sizes 6" and larger shall have globe valve bypass either W-1 15D-2 ob factory installed or field installed. Equal valves by Edwards or Stockham are acceptable. 150 lb., OS&Y forged steel, bolted bonnet, screwed, Vogt #12111 HFS, sizes 1 1/2" and smaller. Equal valves by Velan are acceptable. 2. Globe Valve: 150 lb., O S & Y cast steel, bolted bonnet, flanged, Crane No. 143XR sizes 2" and larger. Equal valves by Edwards or Stockham are acceptable. 150 lb., OS&Y forged steel, bolted bonnet, screwed, Vogt #13141 HFS, sizes 1 1/2" and smaller. Equal valves by Velan are acceptable. 3. Check Valve: 150 lb., cast steel, bolted cap, swing check, flanged, Crane No. 147XU sizes 2" and larger. Equal valves by Edwards and Stockham are acceptable. 150 lb., forged steel, bolted bonnet, piston check, screwed, Vogt #701 HFS sizes 1 1/2" and smaller. Float and Thermostatic Traps (Pressure 15 psig and less): Equal to Dunham Bush No. 40 low pressure. Bucket Traps: Equal to Armstrong Series 800 inverted bucket traps with thermic air vent, rated at 150 psig, with orifices sized for the operating pressure. Drip Traps: High pressure drip trap assemblies shall be provided wherever called for on the drawings and where required to keep such piping systems completely drained of condensate. Traps used in such assemblies shall be 3/4" traps unless specifically shown to the contrary, i.e., they shall have 3/4" inlet and outlet connections. They shall have semi -steel bodies and the internal operating mechanisms shall be made of stainless steel. The valves and valve seats proper of such traps shall be made of heat treated chrome steel. The caps shall be bolted to bodies by the use of alloy steel heat treated machine bolts. These No. 213 Armstrong Traps manufactured by Armstrong Machine Works shall have a capacity for discharging at least 3500 pounds of condensate per hour when operating at a pressure of 150 pounds per square inch. Where drip traps are installed in conjunction with 3" and larger steam lines, a drip pocket of the nature detailed upon the drawings shall be provided where a natural pocket does not exist. The piping and valves in trap assemblies shall be arranged as detailed on the drawings, Schedule 40 pipe shall be used on both sides of the trap. Sediment Strainers: Each drip trap assembly shall be preceded by a sediment strainer. These cast steel sediment strainers shall be suitable for working steam pressures as high as 150 pounds per square inch. These strainers shall be of the size designated on the drawings. The arrangement of these sediment strainers shall be such that the screens may be removed for cleaning with ease through a plug. Stainless steel or Monel metal shall be used to fabricate the non collapsible, lapped screens, which shall contain no soldered joints. In the case of pipe sizes 2-1/2" and larger 15D-3 93008 flanged pattern sediment strainers shall be used. In the case of members smaller than 2-1/2: screwed pattern members shall be installed. Such strainers shall be Yarway No. 821 or 822 strainers manufactured by Yarnall Waring Company. The flanges of flanged strainers shall be dimensioned, faced, drilled and spot faced to conform to the 150 -pound American Standard for Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings (B16e-1939). Full sized blow -off valves shall be installed on all such strainers. Pipe Guides: All high pressure steam piping systems shall be 41 properly guided. At the guide points these lines shall be supported in all directions by four saddles as specified herein - each located 90 degrees from the other. Structural Members and Their Fabrication: All structural steel used for the purpose of fabricating pipe supporting, guiding and anchorage structures shall conform to the Standard specifications for STEEL FOR BRIDGES AND BUILDINGS, A.S.T.M. Designation A7-46. All structural members, unless otherwise specifically stated, shall be new, unused, clean and straight. All holes required in structural members shall be carefully drilled for the proper size. No punching or burning of holes with a torch will be permitted. All structural members shall have all surfaces cleaned of rust, mill scale and other foreign matter in a very thorough manner. All structural surfaces shall be given at least one shop coat of read lead or zinc chromate. This paint shall be thoroughly worked into all joints as well as open spaces. Retouch as required after erection. At all support points in the high pressure steam lines which are not classified as either guide or anchor points, the pipe shall be provided with protection saddles a minimum of 12" in length and sized so that the outer diameter of the saddles shall be the same as the outer diameter of the insulation. After the saddles have been welded in place, the annular opening between the saddle and the pipe shall be filled with insulation to match the pipe insulation. 15D-4 93008 Pipe Anchors: All high pressure steam lines shall be securely anchored at points designated on the drawings and at such other points as may be needed to assure proper control of the expansion of such systems. Refer to Details condensate return piping shall be on the drawings. The supported by the anchor steam and tees at the anchor points; at the rack points these lines shall be supported on the bottom of the piping by the saddles as specified herein. Pipe Guides: All high pressure steam piping systems shall be 41 properly guided. At the guide points these lines shall be supported in all directions by four saddles as specified herein - each located 90 degrees from the other. Structural Members and Their Fabrication: All structural steel used for the purpose of fabricating pipe supporting, guiding and anchorage structures shall conform to the Standard specifications for STEEL FOR BRIDGES AND BUILDINGS, A.S.T.M. Designation A7-46. All structural members, unless otherwise specifically stated, shall be new, unused, clean and straight. All holes required in structural members shall be carefully drilled for the proper size. No punching or burning of holes with a torch will be permitted. All structural members shall have all surfaces cleaned of rust, mill scale and other foreign matter in a very thorough manner. All structural surfaces shall be given at least one shop coat of read lead or zinc chromate. This paint shall be thoroughly worked into all joints as well as open spaces. Retouch as required after erection. At all support points in the high pressure steam lines which are not classified as either guide or anchor points, the pipe shall be provided with protection saddles a minimum of 12" in length and sized so that the outer diameter of the saddles shall be the same as the outer diameter of the insulation. After the saddles have been welded in place, the annular opening between the saddle and the pipe shall be filled with insulation to match the pipe insulation. 15D-4 93008 STEAM PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE: The steam pressure reducing valve shall be a Spence Type E with Type D pilot, sized for the capacity and duty specified and calibrated to reduce to the final pressure indicated. The regulator shall have a cast iron, cast bronze or cast steel body suitable for the pressure and temperature, with Seco metal (hardened steel) seat ring and disc, and stainless steel stem. It shall be suitable for dead end service. The valve shall be pilot operated, using a type D spring loaded pilot. The diaphragm shall be stainless steel. The pressure reducing valve shall be installed in an assembly with a strainer, isolating valves, and a globe valve bypass. The globe valve bypass shall be sized to match the maximum capacity of the pressure reducing valve. Use flange pattern on 2" and larger valves, and union pattern on smaller valves. Provide a steam relief valve with all pressure reducing stations. The relief valve shall be sized to match the maximum capacity of the pressure reducing valve or the valve bypass, whichever is the larger in accordance with A-402 of the National Board Inspection Code. STEAM RELIEF VALVE: Steam relief valves shall be ASME outside spring and yoke steel pop safety valves. Valves shall be Crosby Style HO or equal. Provide a drip pan discharge elbow on its outlet and extend the discharge thru the roof. Provide a Wilson exhaust head on the roof. The relief valve shall be sized to match the maximum capacity of the pressure reducing valve or the valve bypass, whichever is the larger in accordance with A-402 of the National Board Inspection Code. PART III - EXECUTION INSTALLATION OF SYSTEMS: Avoid sags and pockets in steam supply and condensate return lines. Grade each of these lines carefully to insure the unimpeded supply of steam to all heating devices and the prompt return of condensate to the receiver. Pitch condensate return lines and steam lines graded down in the direction of flow not less than 1" in 40 feet. Pitch back graded steam lines not less than 1" in 20 feet. Pitch horizontal runouts to risers and heating elements not less than 1/2" per foot with branches to heating elements grading upward from heating supply mains and downward to return lines. 15D-5 93008 Make upfeed branch connections from mains at an angle of 45 degrees upward from the horizontal and use eccentric fittings where the mains change size. Make downfeed branch connections into the return mains above the centerline of the main; perpendicularly at a 45 degree angle. Install drip traps of the types indicted, where shown on the drawings. Where capacities are not indicated, select each with a capacity of at least twice the rated load of the heating device served. Select traps in low pressure system (15 psig and less) at 1/2 psig differential across the trap. Secure thermostatic traps from the factory with a blank cover on the body and with the trap element and its cover shipped as a separate item. Install each trap with the blank cover in place. When the cleaning operations are completed, replace the blank cover with the regular cover and trap element. Install strainers where indicated. Select strainers for the applicable working pressures with baskets of brass screening suitable for the duty involved. Use "Y" pattern strainers generally with screwed connections up through 2" size and flanged connections above 2" size. Where indicated or necessitated by the accessibility, use vertical pattern strainers. Install valved blow --offs the full size of the blow off opening on all. strainers. Route all relief lines thru the roof. Provide a Wilson exhaust at termination of all steam relief lines at the roof. In the low pressure system (less than 15 psig) grade return lines down from the steam traps to the receiver so that all condensate will return to the receiver by gravity with no lifts enroute. In medium and high pressure systems (over 15 psig) lifts will be permitted in return lines only at trap discharges where absolutely necessary, and where the steam supply is not controlled by an automatic throttling valve. CLEANING• Make final connections to the steam and return mains at the points shown and make all required temporary connections to properly accomplish the cleaning operations. Admit steam at design pressure to the complete new system for 6 hours or more, wasting returns to sewer or to exhaust. Then reconnect returns into receivers. Remove the temporary blank cover plate from each trap and install the regular cover plate with element. Again admit steam at design pressure to the complete system for 6 hours or more, then again remove the cover on each trap and carefully wipe off all grease and dirt. Replace each trap cover tightly on its body and renew any damaged gaskets. Clean out all strainers and scale pockets. 15D-6 93008 During all cleaning operations, constantly observe all parts of the circulating systems for leaks and for faulty circulation and correct any defects. Take precautions during the cleaning operations to protect not only the mechanical work, but the work of all other trades; and should any damage be done, it shall be repaired as new. TESTING: Before concealing or insulating any all pressure sensitive equipment. lines with water pressure of 200 with no leaks. lines, test all piping. Isolate Test all steam and condensate psig for not less than 4 hours END OF SECTION 15D-7 93008 SECTION 15E - CHILLED AND HEATING WATER SYSTEMS PART I - GENERAL NOTE• Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. SUBMITTALS• Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. SCOPE: This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the chilled and heating water systems as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. Install chilled and heating water circulating piping complete and connect to coils, pumps, and other equipment. Include drain lines where shown or required. The Texas Tech University chilled water system modification will be of like materials and constructions to the existing and separated by valves from the City of Lubbock system. PART II - PRODUCTS MATERIALS: Refer to Section "Piping and Accessories". Chilled and Heating Water Lines: Standard weight black steel. Use. Victaulic couplings on lines 4" and larger. Weld smaller lines. Lines 2" and smaller may be screwed using malleable iron banded fittings. The Contractor may offer preinsulated FRP piping as a substitute for steel pipe in the City of Lubbock tunnel and in the Coliseum. Piping in the Texas Tech University tunnel shall be steel with welded joints without substitute. Drain Lines: Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe assembled with 150 pound malleable iron, banded pattern, screwed fittings or, at the Contractor's option may be type L hard copper assembled with wrought copper solder joint fittings. Do not mix the two materials. Automatic Air Vents: ASME labeled; equal to Crane No. 976. Crane and Sarco acceptable. 15E-1 93008 Relief Valves: AASME labeled; equal to Bell and Gossett No. 250 having a relief setting of 125 pounds. Bell and Gossett, Taco or Thrush acceptable. Provide a relief valve in every closed water circulating system. [Suction Diffuser: Gustin-Bacon Series 410 with 1.50 lb. flange pump connection and drain plug.] [Strainer: "Y" pattern Dunham Bush Type "MUL" or "SS -A". Vertical pattern McAlear Series 800.] Expansion Tank: Welded steel, ASME stamped for 125 PSIG. Size shall be as shown on the drawings. Tank shall be provided with valved gage glass, tappings and Bell and Gossett Airtrol tank fitting, and shall have mounting saddles. It shall be supported from the structure on adjustable hanger rods. It shall be factory coated for corrosion resistance. Provide and install in the water supply line to each expansion tank a gate valve, a Bell and Gossett No. D-250 combination anti -syphon pressure reducing valve and relief valve, and a check valve. Connections to Small Coils: Connections to water coils having 3/4" connections and smaller may be served using type "L" soft copper tubing. Provide a Dielectric Unions where steel pipe ends. Use only 95-5 or other high melting solder for these runouts. Shot Feeder: Provide and install a two gallon shot feeder across the supply and return mains of the closed water circulating system. The feeder shall be installed with ball valves on either side of the feeder. Provide an air cock, funnel, fill valve and drain valve. PART III - EXECUTION INSTALLATION OF SYSTEMS: Lay all water circulating lines on an even slope throughout to insure freedom from air locks and traps. Grade the system downward to the circulating pumps with valved drain connections from the low points to floor drains. Where additional low points are unavoidable, provide service drains to permit the complete drainage of the system. Provide automatic air vents at all high points of the system. Where horizontal mains change size, employ eccentric reducing couplings so installed as to keep the tops of coupled pipes on the same level. Install drains from each pump base and from each air unit pan to the nearest floor drain in each case. Provide any other drain. lines indicated on the drawings or required. 15E-2 93008 IM 4b, Install manual of equipment or on the drawing CLEANING• valves where required to segregate individual items sections of circulating systems or where indicated s or required. Chilled Water System:. Fill the system with a solution consisting of either one pound of caustic soda or three pounds of trisodium phosphate per 100 gallons of water. Eliminate all air and circulate this solution for 48 hours. Drain the system and thoroughly flush it with fresh water. Clean out all strainers. Refill the system with fresh water. Heating Water system: Same as chilled water system, except heat the solution. TESTING• Before insulating or concealing any lines, test all piping. Test all lines at 150% of the system working pressure or 100 psig whichever is greater, for not less than 4 hours with no leaks. CHEMICAL TREATMENT. The Contractor shall provide and install the initial chemical treatment and the first year supply of chemical for the City of Lubbock system. Provide chemical analysis report to Engineer indicating system condition after initial fill. The Texas Tech University system will have its own water treatment. Any water added to chilled water piping between Texas Tech utility tunnel and Auditorium/ Coliseum plate heat exchanger shall contain chemicals compatible with Texas Tech chilled water treatment. END OF SECTION 15E-3 93008 SECTION 15F - MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION PART I - GENERAL NOTE• Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. SUBMITTALS• Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. SCOPE: This section applies to piping systems used to transport gases, liquids or semi -liquids. The term "piping systems", includes pipes, fittings, valves and pipe coverings located either inside or outside the buildings. This identification scheme does not apply to piping systems buried in the ground or in tunnels. Existing systems that remain need not be identified. REFERENCES• 1. Occupational Safety and Health Standards - Part 1910.144. 2. Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems - ANSI A 13.1 3. Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards - ANSI 253.1 METHOD OF IDENTIFICATION: The primary identification of a piping system shall be made by a positive identification of the material content of the system by lettered legend, giving the name of the content in full or abbreviated farm. This mark shall be conspicuously placed at frequent intervals on straight runs, close to all valves, at changes of direction and where pipes pass through walls, floors or ceilings. Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow. This identifying mark shall be supplemented by the use of a color code which will indicate the nature of the material carried in the system. Piping systems shall be placed, by the nature of their contents, in one of the basic groups listed below. Each group is assigned a predominant color range as noted. At appropriate intervals identification by two feet lengths of the piping system shall be painted by its proper color code to identify the system. Markers shall be painted on using stencils. Specialties shall be painted as specified for piping. 15F-1 93008 Markers shall be placed on piping at each connection to an item of equipment, at each pump, and on each drop to an outlet. Markers shall be placed on each run of piping at intervals not exceeding 50 feet where exposed in a room and 25 feet when installed above removable ceilings, except that no exposed line shall enter a room without being identified therein. Markers on lines above removable ceilings shall be applied on the undersides of the lines and ducts and in other areas shall be applied to be most visible. Also supply directional flow indicators adjacent to identification markers similarly color coded and sized. Size of Identification: Outside Diameter Size of Legend of Pipe or Covering Letters ( 11 Height) 3/4 to 1-1/4 1/2 1-1/2 to 2 3/4 2-1/2 to 6 1-1/4 8 to 10 2-1/2 Over 10 3-1/2 Colors: Exact colors shall conform to owners Piping Identification Code. All numbers are PITTSBURGH: Piping Steam - 100 PSI Steam - 40 PSI Steam - 15 PSI Condensate - High Pressure Condensate - Low Pressure Condensate - Pump Return Ducts - Supply and Exhaust Hot and Chilled Water Supply & Return Waste and Vent Cold Water Hot Water Fire Lines & Gas (Nat.) Air Lines 15F-2 93008 Color Safety Yellow - 6-264 Safety Yellow - 6-264 Safety Yellow - 6-264 Sunset Orange - 54-124 Sunset Orange - 54-124 Sunset Orange - 54-124 Safety Orange - 6-259 Spanish Blue - 1-346 Flat Black - 54-198 Vista Green - 6-256 Rose Coral - 15P-27 Safety Red - 6-261 Autumn Brown - 54-126 Equipment Pumps H & CH Water Converter A.H. Unit Sump Pump Controls Equipment Copper Pipe Electrical Materials IDENTIFICATION: Seal Brown - 1-344 Rose Coral - 15P-27 Touch up as required Safety Blue - 6-262 Powder Blue - 4P-55 Polish and lacquer Grey The Contractor shall provide and install, on each valve and cock which he installs, a Seton P-250 tag with depressed, black filled numbers and letters identifying the service by letters and the number of the valve. Attach these to the handles of the valves and cocks using meter seals, approved brass S hooks, or heavy copper clad annealed iron wire. Furnish and install where directed a chart or directory listing the complete identification of every valve and cock. This chart shall designate class of service, and shall itemize the valve or cock identified, shall list its exact location, shall give its number, and shall be neatly typed and mounted under a glass pane in a suitable frame. These charts shall, in addition, list the various colors identifying the piping. IDENTIFICATION OF UNDERGROUND LINES: All lines installed underground shall have a 6" wide 0.004" thick color coded, permanent plastic tape buried above the pipe, approximately 12" below grade. The tape shall identify the pipe thus protected. MARKING ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS: Lay -in Ceiling Panels: Use color coded thumb tacks neatly aligned in one corner of the panel to identify valves, fire dampers, smoke dampers, etc. The color code shall conform to the piping identification color code for valve access. The color shall be red for fire and smoke dampers. Stencil 1/2" high letters on concealed access doors to identify fire and smoke dampers. 15F-3 93008 IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING: The Contractor shall make it possible for the personnel operating and maintaining the equipment and systems in this project to readily identify the various pieces of equipment, valves, piping, etc., by marking them. All items of equipment such as fans, pumps, etc., shall be clearly marked using engraved nameplates as hereinafter specified. The item of equipment shall indicate the same number as shown on the drawings. For example, pumps will be identified as P-1, P-21 P-3, etc.; exhaust fans will be EF -1, EF -2, etc.; AC Units will be AC -1, AC -2, etc. All items of mechanical and electrical equipment shall be identified by the attachment of engraved nameplates constructed from laminated phenolic plastic, at least 1/16" thick, 3 -ply, with 1 black surfaces and white core. Engraving shall be condensed gothic, at least 1/2" high, appropriately spaced. Nomenclature on the label shall include the name of the item, its mark number, area, space, or equipment served, and other pertinent information. Equipment to be labeled shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Pumps 2. AC Units 3. Convertors 1 4. Air Conditioning Control Panels and Switches 5. Exhaust Fans 6. Miscellaneous - similar and/or related items END OF SECTION P� �1 15F-4 1 93008 SECTION 15G - AIR DISTRIBUTION PART I - GENERAL NOTE• Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. SUBMITTALS• Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. SCOPE: This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of ductwork, plenums, air distribution devices, dampers and control devices, louvers, curbs and other materials and accessories as described herein and/or as shown on the accompanying drawings, or reasonably implied therefrom. In addition, connect all air conditioning units, automatic dampers, filters and all other materials and install (and/or cooperate in the installation with other trades) those various items of equipment and materials. PART II - PRODUCTS LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK: Except as otherwise specified herein, in other sections of the specifications, and/or noted on the drawings, low pressure ducts shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheets in accordance with the recommended construction for low pressure ducts insofar as gauges of metal to be used, bracing of joints and joint construction as established in the latest edition of the ASHRAE HANDBOOK. Duct construction details shall conform to "Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards", 5th Edition, published by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA). Make square elbows where shown or required, with factory -fabricated turning vanes. Make all other changes in direction with rounded elbows having a centerline radius equal to 1-1/2 times the width of the duct in the plane of the bend. 15G-1 93008 I Make transformations in duct shape or dimension with gradual slopes on all sides. Make increases in dimensions in the direction of air flow, with a maximum slope of 1" in 7" on any side. Make decreases in dimensions in the direction of air flow preferably with a slope of 1" in 7" on any side, but with a maximum slope of 1" in 4" where conditions necessitate. Ducts shall be routed in conjunction with pipes, electrical. conduits, ceiling hangers, etc. so as to avoid interferences insofar as possible. Where duct penetrations are unavoidable, provide streamline shaped sleeves around such material penetrations, made airtight at duct surfaces, except that such sleeves are not required at tie rods. Where obstructions are of a size to exceed 10% of the duct area, the duct shall be transformed to maintain the same duct area. DUCT CONSTRUCTION TEST: A trial leak test, as specified herein, shall be made after ' installation of the first section of each type of ductwork to demonstrate adequacy of the construction details. All testing shall be done in the presence of the Engineer. Each test section shall incorporate at least five transverse joints and all typical fittings. Drawings showing all construction details of test sections, test procedures and instrumentation, and test results shall be submitted for record purposes. No additional ductwork shall be installed until the trial test installation described above has been approved. Low pressure duct shall be tested at 3 "w.c. Construction of low pressure systems shall be inherently airtight and leakage shall be of a sufficiently low magnitude as to be inaudible in quiet ambient and not detectable by sense of feel. ' FIRE DAMPERS• Weighted fire dampers having bronze bearings and held open by fusible links shall be constructed and installed in accordance with the recommendations of the National Fire Protection Association as published in NFPA Bulletin 90A and applicable ordinances and the ' Building code. All fire dampers shall have Underwriters' Laboratory labels. Specifically, fire dampers shall be provided at the points indicated on the drawings, where a duct penetrates a fire rated partition and where a duct penetrates the roof, ceiling, floor or other areas requiring a fire rated separation. They shall also be installed at any other location as required by applicable codes. Provide access panels in the duct and access doors in the ceiling 1 15G-2 1 93008 or wall to service and test the damper. Access doors with vision panes shall be furnished with wire glass. Furnish fire dampers with fusible links rated for 160 degrees F unless indicated otherwise. Fire dampers shall be constructed of galvanized steel and rated at 1-1/2 hours for partitions and floors rated up to 2 hours, and 3 hour rating for use in partitions and floors rated up to 4 hours unless noted otherwise. Blades shall be of the interlocking type, those in high pressure duct shall be 100% free area and out of the air stream. Fire dampers shall be suitable for either horizontal or vertical mounting as required and shall be furnished with factory fabricated sleeve minimum of two gauges heavier than connecting ductwork. Fire dampers in low pressure duct shall be equal to Action Air, Inc. Model 150A. Fire dampers in ceiling air distribution outlets shall be equal to Action Air, Inc. Model 400. AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES: Furnish and install all grilles, registers, and diffusers for every purpose. Refer to the tabulation on the drawings for types, sizes and accessories. All grilles, registers, and diffusers located in the ceiling shall be factory finished in OFF-WHITE. Door grilles shall be factory finished in baked enamel medium birch tan. All other grilles and registers shall be factory primed and spray painted 2 coats on the job. All grilles and registers shall be installed with tamperproof screws and shall be secured to the duct with a minimum of four screws. Where perforated supply grilles are scheduled, they shall be of the type with adjustable curved blades in the neck of the diffusers. Other types are not acceptable. Air distribution devices as manufactured by Barber Colman, Titus, Tuttle and Bailey, Metal -Aire or Krueger will be acceptable. LOUVERS - FIXED• Provide louvers shown on the drawings. Provide with galvanized blades and frames to fit wall construction. Provide with inside insect screen on exhaust louvers and birdscreen on intake louvers. Louvers shall be 4" thick stormproof, Krueger series XY with K blades. Units shall be factory primed for painting on the job. Dimensions shown are nominal. Coordinate exact dimensions with the general construction. END OF SECTION 15G-3 93008 SECTION 15H - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART I - GENERAL NOTE• Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. SUBMITTALS• Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. SCOPE• The Contractor for the work covered by each section of the specifications shall furnish and install all hangers, supports and isolation required by pipe or equipment included in this work. PART II - PRODUCTS MATERIALS: Materials shall be provided for the support of all piping and equipment. The following tabulation lists materials suitable for this duty. Equal materials manufactured by Fee and Mason, Carpenter -Patterson, Grinnell or Modern will be considered. MATERIAL SERVICE FEE AND MASON CAT. Hanger Copper Tubing 3" and smaller 361 copper plated Hanger Steel Lines 3" and smaller 215 or 199 Hanger Steel lines 4" and larger 239 Hanger Outside Insulation -all lines 239 Hanger Cast Iron Lines 239 Hanger Plastic Pipe 108 + 109 Wall Bracket All 150, 151, or 155 Pipe Clamps 2" and Smaller 304 Pipe Clamps 3" and Larger 241 Pipe Rest All 295 or 291 Exp Shield Concrete 374 Beam Clamps All 249, 254, 255, 282, 280 Adjuster All 2381 15H-1 93008 HANGER RODS• All individually suspended horizontal pipes shall be supported by steel rods sized as follows: Rod Diameter Size of Steel Pipe or Size of Cast Iron Copper Tube Supported Pipe Supported 3/8" 2-1/2" and smaller 3" and smaller 1/211 31" and 4" 4" through 6" 5/8" 5" through 8" 8" through 10" 3/4" 10" and larger 12" and larger HANGER SPACING• All hangers shall be so located as to properly support horizontal lines without appreciable sagging of these lines. The following table gives minimum spacing for copper, and steel lines, but hangers shall be more closely spaced where necessitated by conditions or the type of pipe involved or required by code. Size of Line 3/4" and smaller 1" through 1-1/2" 2" and larger All cast iron lines PART III - EXECUTION INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS: Hanger Spacing in Feet 5 7 10 5 (Minimum two per joint) All pipes shall be adequately supported. All piping shall be installed with due regard to expansion and contraction, and the type of hanger, method of support, location of supports, etc. shall be governed in part by this consideration. Transmission of vibration and noise shall also be considered and any special suspension with vibration dampeners required to minimize transmissions shall be used where specified or required. All exposed vertical risers running near walls shall be supported from the walls. Each line shall have a minimum of 2 supports, not greater than 1010" on centers, with the additional provision that there shall be a support near the top of the riser. All supports shall be aligned. All vertical pipes shall be supported with riser clamps sized to fit the lines and to adequately support their weight. At the bases of lines, where required for proper supports, furnish and install anchor base fittings or other approved supports. 15H-2 93008 W r , L Hangers supporting insulated lines which are specified to be finished with a vapor seal shall be fitted outside the insulation. The insulation or horizontal lines shall be protected by low compression insulation shields. On all pipes the shields shall be Fee and Mason Fig. 81 or rolled 14 gauge galvanized. The shields on horizontal lines shall be positioned so that they encompass the bottom of the pipe and are centered on the hanger or support. On vertical lines there shall be two shields of the same type full encompassing the pipe at each clamp. Shields shall be secured with a 3/411 wide lacquered steel band at each end. ' New hot/chilled water piping shall be supported from the knee hinged arches and their bracing trusses at about the same locations as the existing steam and condensate piping, in a similar manner. See Sheet M-7 for details. New AHUs shall be supported from the existing channel supports serving the existing units. Brace channels with new channel and by new diagonal braces as shown on the attached drawings. See M -7/A--1 Details A and B. 11 n 1 93008 15H-3 the floor and a Where vertical lines run down to a point near support is needed, they may be supported by means of a pipe leg welded to the pipe, extending down to the floor and terminating in a capped end resting on the floor. Where pipes other than those specified hereinbefore, are running along walls, they shall be supported using hangers as described hereinbefore, but suspended from brackets bolted to the wall. Specially fabricated clips or U -braces may be used where commercially manufactured items are not available in the proper size. Where pipes run under steel construction, use beam clamps on beams. Under steel joists, piping may be suspended from rods thru the bottom chord with washers and double nuts. On piping larger than 411, verify the joist strength before installation. Where multiple lines are run horizontally at the same elevations and grades, they may be supported on trapezes formed for sections of Unistrut, angle iron, or channels suspended on rods or pipes. Trapeze members, including the suspension rods, shall be properly W sized for the number, size and loaded weight of the lines they are to support. Trapeze spacings shall be in accordance with the preceding table for the smallest line supported on or from the trapezes. Perforated strap iron and wire will under no circumstances be acceptable as hanger material. Hangers supporting insulated lines which are specified to be finished with a vapor seal shall be fitted outside the insulation. The insulation or horizontal lines shall be protected by low compression insulation shields. On all pipes the shields shall be Fee and Mason Fig. 81 or rolled 14 gauge galvanized. The shields on horizontal lines shall be positioned so that they encompass the bottom of the pipe and are centered on the hanger or support. On vertical lines there shall be two shields of the same type full encompassing the pipe at each clamp. Shields shall be secured with a 3/411 wide lacquered steel band at each end. ' New hot/chilled water piping shall be supported from the knee hinged arches and their bracing trusses at about the same locations as the existing steam and condensate piping, in a similar manner. See Sheet M-7 for details. New AHUs shall be supported from the existing channel supports serving the existing units. Brace channels with new channel and by new diagonal braces as shown on the attached drawings. See M -7/A--1 Details A and B. 11 n 1 93008 15H-3 COOPERATION BETWEEN TRADES: Where pipes specified under different sections may possibly be racked on the same supporting structure, each trade shall cooperate with the others involved to properly locate the supporting members and shall furnish a proportionate share of the labor and materials involved in the installation. Any other special hangers and supports shall be provided and installed as indicated on the drawings, specified elsewhere herein or required by conditions at the site. DUCT HANGERS: All ductwork shall be supported in accordance with standards published by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association Inc. END OF SECTION 15H-4 93008 II SECTION 15I - INSULATION PART I - GENERAL NOTE: Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements and Supplemental Conditions. ■ SUBMITTALS• Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. SCOPE- This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of thermal insulation, coverings, jackets, supports, shields, etc. as described herein and/or as shown on the accompanying drawings, or reasonably implied therefrom. All surfaces which may vary from the ambient temperature shall be insulated unless specifically excepted. All insulation and jackets in the Texas Tech University tunnel shall match existing materials and constructions. PART II - PRODUCTS MATERIALS• In describing the various materials, application procedures, and finishes, each item will be described singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical applications. Also where the description is only general in nature, exact dimensions, arrangements and other data shall be determined by reference to plans, schedules, and details, including those provided by equipment manufacturers. Where materials are described under other sections of the specifications and are pertinent to this section, they shall be installed hereunder as though they were repeated herein. All insulation shall have composite fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by procedure NFPA 225, not exceeding flame spread 25, smoke developed 50. Accessories such as adhesives, mastics, cement, tape, cloth, etc. shall have these same component ratings. All materials installed under this section of the specifications shall be manufactured in the United States of America. 1 151-1 '930011 VAPOR BARRIER JACKETS: Factory -applied vapor -barrier jackets shall be laminated of flame resistant white kraft paper and .001 inch thick aluminum foil reinforced with glass fiber fabric between the foil and the paper. The foil and paper shall be adhered with a flame resistant latex adhesive. Where specified, insulate valves and fittings with two fiberglass inserts and preformed Manville "Zeston" covers with taped seams. Where metal jackets are specified, they shall be 0.016" thick No. 5005 tempered aluminum secured with machine drawn 0.0201' stainless steel bands. PART III - EXECUTION INSTALLATION: The installation of all thermal insulation shall be performed by a recognized firm regularly engaged in the insulation business, using skilled insulation mechanics and using insulation materials which are the product of reputable manufacturer of the materials, using any special materials as required by these specifications and by those published standards. Any insulation which is not applied in a workmanlike manner will be rejected and replaced. All coverings shall be smooth, flush, dressed to line and tight. Mastic shall be neatly applied and tooled. The Engineer reserves the right to reject any insulation whose appearance he deems unacceptable. APPLICATION OF INSULATION: Apply insulation and pipe covering after all work has been tested, found to be tight and accepted as such by the Engineer. Thoroughly clean and dry all surfaces to be covered. On glass fiber pipe covering with factory -applied vapor -barrier jacket, lap the jacket on the longitudinal seams and seal with vapor barrier lap adhesive equal to Benjamin Foster 82-07 or use self sealing lap. Tightly butt the ends and cover butt joints with a 4" wide band of vapor barrier jacket secured with the same adhesive. Except where insulation is cloth jacketed, band all pipe insulation, following the completion of painting operations. Bands shall be aluminum not less than 3/4 inch wide. Space bands a maximum of 12" on centers, with three bands per section of covering. Where sections of insulation are overlapped as at flanges, apply a band at each of the overlapping sections and one 15I-2 93008 on the basic line covering immediately adjacent to the end of the overlap. Provide bands also on each side of each valve, fitting, etc. and at the end terminal where the insulation is beveled off as specified herein. Also band the hanger shields on insulated cold lines with a band at each end of each shield. INSULATION ON EQUIPMENT AND PIPING SYSTEMS: The following describes materials, thicknesses and finishes for ' insulation and coverings. In the following, the word "exposed" shall apply to any line, duct, or other material or surface in any room above the lowest floor in any building unit, exterior to the building and above ground, and/or in equipment rooms; the word "concealed" shall apply to any line, duct, or other material or surface in other underfloor areas, ceiling spaces furrings and chases. Also included in this section is the requirement for patching and repair of existing insulation where new connections are made. Steam and Condensate Piping: High pressure steam lines and the returns in connection therewith shall be insulated completely using Manville "Thermo -12" molded pipe covering; except for a cooling leg on the run to each condensate drip trap. The bodies of valves, unions, flanges, and other appurtenances shall be covered. On the uncovered cooling leg, the line from the scale pocket to the trap body shall be uninsulated, but insulate from the trap discharge on. Insulation shall be beveled off at valve bonnets, trap bodies, at plugs on strainers, and at caps on scale pockets. Lines 3" and smaller in size shall be covered with. 1" thick insulation and lines 4" and larger in size shall be covered with 1-1/211 thick insulation. On three inch and smaller lines, valves and fittings shall be insulated with" insulating cement to the same thickness as adjacent pipe and then covered with a jacket. Unions shall be covered by building up with insulating cement to an equivalent thickness of the adjacent piping or partially building up with insulating cement and finishing with larger sectional insulation or block insulation lagged on and finishing as described for fittings on larger lines. on lines 3-1/2 inches and larger in size, the bodies of valves and fittings and the flanges in all lines shall be insulated using block insulation of the same type as used on the adjacent pipe, but 1/2 inch less in thickness. The blocks shall be carefully fitted and securely wired in place and then covered with two coats of insulating cement to a total thickness of 1/2 inch and then covered with jacket. At flanges, the insulation shall extend at least two inches over the adjacent pipe covering on each side and the joints shall be filled with insulation and sealed with insulating cement. 151-3 1 93008 In the Texas Tech University tunnel all steam and condensate piping shall have a metal jacket in the City of Lubbock tunnel and in the Coliseum. On the above insulated lines, the outer jackets on all lines exposed in any space, including machinery rooms, shall be glass cloth. On those lines running concealed in chases, furrings, and attics, the outer jacket shall be Manville flame safe GPC. The flaps shall be sealed and all other jacket shall be pasted on using Benjamin Foster 30-36. Steam and Condensate Piping: Steam lines and the returns in connection therewith shall be insulated completely using Manville "Micro-lok 650" molded pipe covering. The bodies of valves, unions, flanges, and other appurtenances shall be covered. On the uncovered cooling leg, the line from the scale pocket to the trap body shall be uninsulated, but insulate from the trap discharge on. Insulation shall be beveled off at valve bonnets, trap bodies, at plugs on strainers, and at caps on scale pockets. Lines 311 and smaller in size shall be covered with 1-1/211 thick insulation and lines 4" and larger in size shall be covered with 211 thick insulation. Valves and fittings shall be insulated with insulating cement to the same thickness as adjacent pipe and then covered with a jacket. Unions shall be covered by building up with insulating cement to an equivalent thickness of the adjacent piping or partially building up with insulating cement and finishing with larger sectional insulation. At flanges, the insulation shall extend at least two inches over the adjacent pipe covering on each side and the joints shall be filled with insulation and sealed with insulating cement. On the above insulated lines, the outer jackets on all lines exposed in any space, including machinery rooms, shall be glass cloth. On those lines running concealed in chases, furrings, and attics, the outer jacket shall be Manville flame safe APT. The flaps shall be sealed. In the Texas Tech University Tunnel Steam and Condensate Piping: All steam and condensate piping (excluding trap assemblies up to the unions) shall be insulated with a single layer of Manville Thermo -12 "Metal -on". The thickness schedule for this insulation shall be as follows: Pipe size Thickness Steam lines 411 and smaller 1-1/21- 511 thru lo" 3" Larger than 10" 311 Condensate All li'' • 9r•. 15I-4 All welded fittings shall be insulated with mitered sections of Manville Thermo -12 of the same thickness as the adjacent pipe insulation and jacketed with "Premetco" preformed aluminum fitting covers. Insulation shall butt against the flanges. Flanges shall be insulated with appropriate size pipe covering and metal jackets. Valves, fittings, and other devices smaller than 2-1/21" shall be insulated with insulating cement and jacketed with "Premetco" preformed aluminum fitting covers. Valves, fittings, and other devices larger than 311, and expansion joints shall be covered with built-up removable coverings of Thermo -12. These coverings shall be banded on the devices so that they may be easily removed and re -installed. All insulation shall be jacketed with "Premetco" preformed aluminum covers. Chilled Water Lines: In the City of Lubbock Tunnels and Coliseum insulate with molded sectional glass fiber pipe covering with factory applied all purpose vapor barrier jacket equal to Manville "Micro -Lok APT 650". Insulation shall be 1-1/2" thick. Insulate valves and fittings with fiberglass inserts and "Zeston" PVC covers. Note contractor's option for pre -insulated piping. Chilled Water Lines: In Texas Tech Tunnels all chilled water lines shall be insulated with Pittsburg -Corning "Foamglass" insulation. Insulation shall be single thickness molded pipe insulation according to the following sizes. Pipe below 8" nominal diameter, 21' thick Pipe 8" and larger nominal diameter, 3" thick Specific instructions of the manufacturer shall be secured and followed. Extreme care shall be exercised to preserve the vapor barrier. Procedure: Butter on joints with an approved sealer such as Pittsburgh Corning's Pittcote 300 asphalt based or equal sufficiently to vapor seal the joints. Apply Foamglass insulation to clean dry surface of pipe with joints tightly butted and secure with bands. Bands shall be on 91' centers with 1.8" lengths of insulation and on 12" centers for 24" lengths. Seals or bands shall be carefully embedded into the insulation prior to receiving additional vapor barrier mastic and final covering material. Finish: Completely cover insulation with vapor barrier mastic in a thick coat. Fill any void or chinks with cut pieces of foamglass insulation and coat with vapor barrier mastic. Fill voids in shields with foamglass insulation and cover open ends and entire saddle with vapor barrier mastic. 15I-5 1 93008 Covering: A jacket of .016 aluminum shall be applied over the insulation. Provide a minimum 3" overlap and fasten snugly with .020 SS bands, at overlap and not less then 24" on centers. valves and Fittings: Fitting insulation shall be applied in the same manner as adjacent pipe insulation with sufficient bands to hold securely in place. Where it is impractical to finish fittings the same as adjoining pipe insulation (metal jacket), fittings may be finished with glass fabric and cutback, and painted to match jacket, where approved by the Engineer. Drain Lines: 3/8" thick Manville Type II "Aerotube". Insulation may be slit flange type or threaded on during fabrication. Converter: Two inch thick, Manville "Thermo -12" molded pipe covering or blocks, wired in place. Fill all cracks and voids with insulating cement. Finish with wire mesh, cement plaster and cloth jacket, and paint. Plate Heat Exchanger: Insulate the heat exchanger surface with 3/4" thick Armstrong Armaflex 22 and sheet insulation. Joints and seams shall be joined with Armstrong 520 adhesive. Care shall be taken to achieve a vapor seal. Finish with two coats of Armstrong Insulcolor applied directly to the sheet insulation. Apply insulation and finish in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Ducts: Insulate the supply, return and fresh air ducts with 1.5" thick Manville "Microlite R Series", type 150 glass fiber flexible insulation having a factory applied FSKL vapor barrier jacket. This insulation shall be secured, vapor barrier side out, to sheet metal. On horizontal runs, lap top and bottom sheets over edges of side pieces. Butt joints tightly. Except on ducts handling warm air only, seal all joints, punctures, breaks and fasteners with two coats of Benjamin Foster 30-35 adhesive. Embed three inch wide Glassfab membrane in adhesive between coats. Cover all joints, punctures and breaks with three inch wide facing strip. Ducts handling warm air only need not be vapor sealed. END OF SECTION 151-6 93008 SECTION 15J - EQUIPMENT PART I - GENERAL NOTE• ' Conform with the applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental conditions. SUBMITTALS• Submit manufacturer's data and shop drawings on all items specified. SCOPE• This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the mechanical equipment as shown on the drawings and/or as specified herein. This section requires the furnishing of all equipment specified and/or shown on the drawings. Equipment referred to singularly shall mean each item, and the total number of items shown or specified shall be furnished. All equipment shall be manufactured d in the USA. All appurtenances and auxiliary equipment necessary to the function of any specified item of equipment shall be furnished with the item of equipment, whether specifically mentioned or not. Each item of equipment shall perform the function for which it is intended, and all work necessary to provide a complete functional system shall be provided. This specification requires that all items of equipment be completely installed, finally connected, tested and placed in service. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify all requirements of the equipment and the contract and certify with the submittal of the shop drawings that all requirements have been met, including: 1. Space requirements 2. Electrical requirements (voltage, phase, wires - no. and size) 3. Capacities 4. Clearance for maintenance 5. Quality 5. Quantity 15J-1 930011 PART II - PRODUCTS MOTORS• Motors shall be furnished for all motor driven equipment. Motors with special operating conditions such as multiple speed or in hazardous locations shall be as specified under the equipment served. General service motors driving through flexible couplings or belts shall conform to the following requirements: 1. Less than 1/6 HP: Split phase, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.0. 2. Fractional larger than 1/6 HP: Capacitor start, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.0 or greater. 3. Integral Horsepower, Single Phase: Capacitor type, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1..15. 4. Three Phase: High efficiency continuous duty squirrel cage type, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or totally enclosed fan cooled as required by exposure with a service factor of 1.15. Power factor shall be 85% or greater. Motors shall be equal to Gould E -Plus. Starters in Motor Control Centers: Refer to Electrical Drawings for starters in motor control centers. Coordinate exact starter requirements and details with Division 16. BELT GUARDS• Belt guards shall be provided for all belt driven equipment installed under this contract. Guards shall be rigidly constructed of 18 gauge sheet metal on angle iron frame, with fronts of expanded metal or 1/2 inch mesh hardware cloth. Guards shall be sized to permit belt tightening to the full extent of the motor slide rails. They shall be securely installed in such fashion as to permit ready removal for servicing of the protected drive. Guards shall have tach holes. WATER CIRCULATING PUMPS: Pumps shall be as indicated in the schedule on the drawings. Each shall be of the type, rotational speed, and have the flow rate and characteristics listed. The name and model number listed for each pump establishes a standard which the pump furnished must equal to exceed. 15J-2 93008 Acceptable makers of scheduled pumps are Allis-Chalmers, Buffalo, Weinman, Peerless, Aurora and Paco. Pumps, casings and glands shall be suitable for operation under 150 prig static heads. Rotational speeds shall not exceed those scheduled. Under no circumstances shall a pump be offered with an impeller radius greater than 90% of the distance from the shaft centerline to the cutoff in the casing, except in the case of in-line circulators. The head capacities are listed for bidding purposes only. The Contractor shall carefully calculate the head of each pump, taking into consideration the pressure drops in all equipment, exact lengths of pipe, valves, fittings, etc. These calculations shall take into account actual routing of the piping and all other factors that would determine the actual pumping head of each system, and shall form the basis of final pump selection. Motors shall be constant speed, drip proof motors, and shall be so sized with relation to the pump impeller that the required brake horsepower will not exceed the rated motor horsepower at any point on the pump curve. Copies of manufacturer's performance curve shall be submitted as shop drawings on each pump. Each curve shall be clearly marked to indicate the diameter of the impeller and the selection point. All pump motors shall have 1.15 service factor. All pumps shall have gauge tappings. Pumps baseplates shall be of cast iron or welded structural steel shapes, and shall have a raised lip and threaded drain connection. Each baseplate on a pump handling chilled water shall be of sufficient size to extend under and catch the drip from connecting flanges and the outboard bearing. All pumps shall be factory enameled. Horizontal Split Case Pump: Pump construction shall consist of cast iron casing with double suction bronze impeller, horizontal split case with flanged inlet and outlet. The shaft shall be carbon steel with bronze sleeves. Ball bearings shall be 250,000 hour average life, grease lubricated with slinger. Wearing rings shall be bronze. Provide with mechanical seals. The coupling shall be Thomas or Woods with guard. Provide extended cast iron base with drain connection. Close Coupled Pumps: Pump construction shall consist of cast iron casing and bronze impeller. The shaft shall be carbon steel with renewable bronze wear rings. Ball bearings shall be 100,000 hour average life and grease lubricated. Provide with mechanical seals. Motor shall be NEMA c -face standard per Hydraulic Institute. 15J-3 1 93008 DUPLEX SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMP: Furnish a duplex heavy duty submersible non -clog sump sewage system as manufactured by Hydr-O-Matic Pump Division, to include submersible sump pumps, electrical controls and accessories to make a completely automatic system. Hydr-O-Matic Model No. S. Each pump shall have the capacity and characteristics as scheduled on the drawings. Motor: Submersible motor to be constructed with open winding and to operate in clean dry dielectric oil for cooling winding and lubricating motor bearings. Motor shaft and housing to be sealed with two mechanical shaft seals with an oil chamber between seals. The lower seal shall be tungsten carbide and the upper seal shall be carbon and ceramic. Integral motor and pump shaft to be of 343 stainless steel supported by upper and lower ball bearings. Material: Pump and motor housings to be of high quality cast iron. Impeller to be of high grade bronze of the non -clog type suitable for handling sewage and drainage water. All fasteners to be of 18-8 stainless steel. Level Controls: Mercury tube switch level controls shall control duplex unit. Controls shall be automatic with four level control and electric alternator. The lower control is set at the turn-off level, the upper control is set at the turn -on level required and the override control is set above the upper control so that both pumps will come on if the level rises above upper control. A fourth control shall operate a high level alarm. Electrical Control Panel: Control panel shall have a NEMA III weather-proof enclosure and shall be dead front with separate removable inside panel to protect electrical equipment. A lock hasp shall be provided on outside door. A circuit breaker, and a magnetic contactor with separate NEMA rated 3 -leg overload protection, shall be provided for each pump. An alternating relay shall be provided to alternate pump on each successive cycle of operation. Contactors shall have auxiliary contacts to operate both pumps on override conditions. An interlock relay shall be provided to automatically reconnect the control circuit in case of circuit breaker trip on one pump. HOA switches and run lights shall be provided for each pump. Terminal strip shall be provided to connect control cables, and auxiliary terminals to connect remote alarms. All control panels include a transformer to reduce control voltage to 24 volts. Seal Failure Alarm: An electrode probe shall be installed in the seal chamber such that if water enters the chamber through the lower seal an alarm shall be transmitted to the control panel. A flashing red pilot light on the panel shall indicate seal failure. 15J-4 I 93008 FANS: The fans indicated on the drawings shall be provided in accordance with the schedule on the drawings. All v -belt drives shall be a variable pitch type and shall be so selected that the specified fan performance occurs at approximately the midpoint of the adjustable range. Motor mounting shall be flexible to permit belt tightening. The static pressure tabulated in the schedule is for bidding purposes only. The fan shall be adjusted to achieve the air delivery specified and if changing of the motor and drive is required it shall be done at no increase in the contract. w Motor and Drive: The motor shall be open drip proof NEMA T frame design to meet horsepower and electrical requirements specified. The adjustable v -belt drive shall be selected for a 1.4 service factor based on motor horsepower and shall be factory set for the specified rpm. The motor shall be mounted for alignment and tensioning the belts. Conduit shall be flexible. Provide isolators and flexible duct connections with each fan to limit the transmission of noise and vibration. Fans shall be AMCA rated as scheduled. Fans shall be furnished with backdraft dampers and disconnect. Fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Fans shall have factory applied finish. Fan motors 1/8 HP and larger shall be permanent capacitor start type. AIR UNITS, LOW PRESSURE: Air units shall be of the modular, double wall, factory assembled, standard catalogued, low pressure type as manufactured by Carrier 39NX, Trane CLCH, or McQuay. Refer to schedule on drawings. The double wall sections which constitute the completed air conditioning unit shall each be assembled at the factory in a sheet metal housing appropriately finished, and shipped as a unit. They shall be assembled on the job into complete units having physical and performance characteristics as detailed and scheduled, suitable for application at the static pressure indicated in the schedule. Each air unit shall be complete with the following components: 67 93008 71 15J-5 Fan Casing: Fabricated of heavy gage steel sheets bolted to structural framing and reinforcing members. Panels and reinforcing shall be not less than the following thickness. ITEM Discharge Panel End Panels Front Panel UNITS LARGER THAN 6500 CFM 16 gauge 12 gauge 12 gauge UNITS SMALLER THAN 6500 CFM Casings shall be double wall gasketed air tight. 20 gauge 16 gauge 14 gauge Coil Casing: Fabricated of heavy gauge stainless steel sheets bolted to structural framing and reinforcing members. Panels and reinforcing shall be not less than the following thickness: ITEM End Panels Top Panel Front Panel Drain Pan Reinforcing Support Channels UNITS LARGER THAN 6500 CFM 18 gauge 18 gauge 18 gauge 14 gauge 10 gauge 10 gauge UNITS SMALLER THAN 6500 CFM 20 gauge 20 gauge 20 gauge 16 gauge 10 gauge 10 gauge Casing shall be double wall gasketed air tight and water tight. Units with welded tubular steel frames and bolted panels having equivalent strength will be considered. Drain pans shall be stainless steel with foamed in place plastic insulation. Fan: Airfoil blade, class 1 AMCA rated, selected for maximum efficiency, delivery, static pressure, and BHP at the operating point. Submit calculations based on the 1970 ASHRAE method indicating the sound power generated at the midrange frequency of the audible octave bands. Sound power levels shall not exceed the following tabulation: (Refer: 10-12 watts). Frequency 12.5 250 500 1000 2000 4000 Sound Power 75 65 58 55 53 44 Fan curve shall indicate that operation is stable at 20 percent above and 20 percent below the selected RPM. Static efficiency at the selection point shall be 60 percent or more. Fan shaft shall be selected to operate at a speed 30% or more below its first critical speed. The rotating assembly shall be statically and dynamically balanced. When the unit is running 15J-6 93008 11 I � there shall be no visible deflection of any panel and no noise of metal to metal contact. If, in the judgement of the Architect, objectionable noise or vibration is observed, the units shall be aligned and dynamically balanced on the job by a factory mechanic to industrial tolerances, at no additional cost. Balancing method and tolerances shall be approved by the Architect. Any detective component shall be replaced. Fan scrolls and wheels shall be designed as a unit with smooth belled inlet and adjustable cut-off. Fan wheel shall be keyed to the shaft and shall be removable. Bearings shall be ball or roller type rated for 200,000 hour life. Bearing shall be bolted to structural bearing supports. Extend copper lube lines to a common convenient point. Each fan shaft shall have two bearings only. Motor and Drive: Motor shall be not less than the horsepower scheduled, 1750 RPM, dripproof. . Drive shall be selected for 120% of the maximum motor horsepower. Provide an adjustable drive, selected for the RPM of the fan with 10% adjustment above and below the selected speed. The motor shall be installed in the unit fan housing on adjustable rails or cradle to permit belt tensioning and alignment. Provide flexible conduit for wiring the motor. Provide 241lx36" access doors on both sides of the fan section and in the filter mixing box section. Cooling Coils: ARI certified water tube type with copper tubes and aluminum fins, mechanically bonded, pressure tested at 250 psig. Cooling coils shall have not less than 6 rows of tubes. Fin spacing may vary to produce the scheduled capacity, but may not have less than 6 fins per in. or more than 10 fins per inch. Insulation: Double wall casings shall be internally insulated with 1" thick 3/4 lb. neoprene coated fiberglass. Drain pans shall be insulated with 1/2" thick foamed in place plastic insulation. Vibration Isolators: Spring type, with neoprene pad base, and stop. Static deflection shall be 211. Drain: Provide full size drain line to nearest floor drain and turn down. Drain shall have 6" deep p -trap. Filters: As specified under "FILTERS". Dampers: Units where shown shall be equipped with factory installed low leakage, damper section with blades, ribs, bearings and interconnecting linkage. 15J-7 93008 PLATE HEAT EXCHANGER: Furnish and install a plate heat exchanger as shown and scheduled on the drawings. The heat exchanger shall be as manufactured by Alfa Laval, Inc. Equipment shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest edition and addenda of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section VIII, Division I, or Section III, Class 3, for 150 psi. The heat exchanger shall consist of a removable assembly of Basketed plates supported in a sturdy frame, fitted with inlet and outlet nozzles. The apparatus shall be furnished with guide rails or carrying bars to allow horizontal disassembly of unit for cleaning. Gaskets shall be nitrile, plates and nozzles shall be SA 240-304 stainless steel. Provide one set of spare gaskets with the unit. 13i6ll '.W Provide all filters specified herein and/or scheduled or shown on the drawings. All filters shall be erected in holding frames, tight fitting, with no bypass path. All filters of every type shall be UL listed Class I or II. Every air handling device which supplies air to any space shall have a filter bank. No., size, and type of filters, shall be as scheduled on the drawings. All frames shall be fitted with new media at final acceptance. In addition provide 100% spare filters. Disposable Medium Efficiency Filters: Filters shall be medium efficiency (30-35% based on ASHRAE 52-68) at a velocity of 500 FFM. Media shall be pleated, non woven reinforced cotton fabric supported by a welded wire grid with 95%, open area. Frame shall be heavy duty waterproof chipboard. Filter shall have not less than 4.5 square feet of media per foot of face area. Filters shall be equal to Farr 30/30 series. CONVERTERS: Furnish and install, where indicated on the plans, steam -to -water heat exchangers complete with supporting structure. Each unit shall have the capacity scheduled. Each shall have a pressure drop not greater than five feet in water circuit when handling the quantity of water specified. The capacity of the heat exchanger shall be based upon a scale factor of 0.001. 15J-8 93008 END OF SECTION 15J-9 93008 Each heat exchanger shall be of the shell and tube type with removable head. The tubes shall be of 3/4 inch 18 gauge OD copper tubing. Tube sheets shall be of welded steel. Each head of copper or brass and shells shall be shall be of cast iron bolted onto the shell. Brass baffles shall be provided to properly distribute the steam entering the shell, withstand a working pressure and each unit shall be designed to in the steam and water circuits of 125 psig. All construction shall be in accordance with ASME Codes governing unfired pressure ASME label. vessels and each unit shall bear the Each shall be provided with cradle supports and the assembly shall be supported on a steel structure formed using beams, pipe supports, and angles with hold-down bolts. Weld beams, supports and flanges to form a rigid assembly. END OF SECTION 15J-9 93008 SECTION 15K - TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING -MEC ANICAL SYSTEMS PART I - GENERAL NOTE• Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. SCOPE: This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the testing, balancing and adjusting of various systems and portions thereof to produce proper flows of air and water, correct setting of regulation devices, and other end results as more fully described hereinafter. Upon completion of the installation and start up of the mechanical equipment, check, adjust, and balance systemic components to obtain optimum conditions in each conditioned space to the building. Prepare and submit to the Engineer complete reports on the balance and operation of the system. Make a total of three inspections within 90 days after occupancy of the building to insure that satisfactory conditions are being maintained throughout and to satisfy any unusual conditions. Make inspections in the building during the opposite season from that in which the initial adjustments were made and at those times make any necessary modifications to the initial adjustments required to produce optimum operation of the systemic components, to produce the proper conditions in each conditioned space. During the balancing, the temperature regulation shall be adjusted for proper relationship between controlling instruments and calibrated by the Contractor. The correctness of the final setting shall be proved by taking hourly readings for a period of 2 successive eight hour days in the Coliseum. The total variation shall not exceed two degrees from the preset median temperature during the entire temperature survey period. In all fan systems, the air quantities shown on the plans may be varied as required to secure a maximum temperature variation of 2 degrees within each separately controlled zone, but the total air quantity indicated for each zone must be obtained. It shall be the obligation of the Contractor to furnish or revise fan drives and/or motors if necessary, without cost to the Owner, to attain the specified air volumes. 15K-1 93008 6. Motor current readings at each fan and pump. The voltages at the time of the reading shall be listed. The above data shall be neatly entered on appropriate forms together with any typed supplements required to completely document all results. Written explanations of any abnormal conditions shall be included. All this shall be assembled into a suitable brochure and a total of 4 copies shall be provided. When opposite season modifications are made, additional data sheets indicating new settings, readings, etc., shall be prepared and submitted in quadruplicate. INSTRUCTIONS. During the test periods instruct the building operating personnel in the operation and maintenance of all equipment. Deliver to the Owner 3 complete instruction manuals covering the maintenance and operation of the system components. In addition, provide schematic wiring diagrams of each piece of equipment framed under glass and mounted on the wall as directed. Provide complete data on all equipment, including for each item a parts list, and the name and address of the vendor where replacement parts can be purchased. END OF SECTION 15K-2 93008 Before final acceptance is made, furnish the following data: 1. A tabulation of the simultaneous temperature of all spaces on each separately controlled zone, together with the outside temperature at time of measurement. 2. A listing of the measured air quantities at each outlet corresponding to the temperature tabulation specified above. 3. Air quantities at each return and exhaust air handling device. 4. Flow rate and temperature at each coil and heating device. 5. Static pressure readings entering and leaving each supply, and exhaust fan, and other components of the system. These readings shall be related to fan curves in terms of CFM handled. 6. Motor current readings at each fan and pump. The voltages at the time of the reading shall be listed. The above data shall be neatly entered on appropriate forms together with any typed supplements required to completely document all results. Written explanations of any abnormal conditions shall be included. All this shall be assembled into a suitable brochure and a total of 4 copies shall be provided. When opposite season modifications are made, additional data sheets indicating new settings, readings, etc., shall be prepared and submitted in quadruplicate. INSTRUCTIONS. During the test periods instruct the building operating personnel in the operation and maintenance of all equipment. Deliver to the Owner 3 complete instruction manuals covering the maintenance and operation of the system components. In addition, provide schematic wiring diagrams of each piece of equipment framed under glass and mounted on the wall as directed. Provide complete data on all equipment, including for each item a parts list, and the name and address of the vendor where replacement parts can be purchased. END OF SECTION 15K-2 93008 SECTION 15L - TEMPERATURE REGULATION PART I -- GENERAL NOTE• Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements and Supplemental Conditions. SUBMITTALS• Submit manufacturer's data on all materials and equipment. Include system schematics indicating all devices, existing and added in pneumatic piping, electrical wiring and sequence of operation. Sequence of operation shall reference each component device by designation used on schematics. SCOPE• This Contractor shall include in his bid an amount necessary to cover a complete system of automatic temperature regulating equipment. It is intended the Texas Tech University remote control valves operating system be pneumatic in operation. The City of Lubbock air conditioning system shall have electric control operation except for certain sensing functions, remote starting and stopping provisions, resetting arrangements, and alarm indications which can best be performed by electronic instruments. It shall include all master and submaster thermostats, valves, dampers, and operators, amplifiers, air receivers, switches, piping, air regulator, relays, multiplexers, cabinets, etc. required to make it complete in full accordance with the intent of the plans and the following description. Wiring for all the remote indicating, motor control, control set point and adjustment and alarm devices shall originate in an energy management system (EMS) cabinet with PC terminal board and modem and extend to and connect to all multiplexers, relays, thermocouples, and similar devices. The wiring shall be performed by the Contractor under Division 16 in accordance with diagrams on the plans, as specified herein and as indicated on the drawings which this contractor shall provide. The temperature regulation equipment shall be installed and adjusted to secure the sequences described hereinafter. The materials and equipment described herein shall be sufficient to any of the remote devices of reference elsewhere herein, but shall be arranged as required to operate in conjunction with those remote devices. The Contractor shall furnish and install all automatic dampers except those furnished in the air units, and all automatic valves. 15L-1 93008 The Contractor shall furnish, install, and adjust all damper and valve operators and all other switches, relays, etc. comprising the temperature regulation system. Temperature regulation specified herein is based on Johnson Controls. Johnson Controls or Honeywell will be considered on the City of Lubbock air conditioning system. The Texas Tech University control valves and flow sensors must be compatible with the existing campus Johnson Controls system. PART II - PRODUCTS COMPRESSED AIR• Existing Texas Tech University instrument air supply may be used to operate the remote control valves located in the Texas Tech University tunnel vault. PIPING• All exposed tubing and conduit shall be run parallel to or at right angles to the building structure and shall be concealed in all finished spaces. Tubing may be run exposed in mechanical rooms or areas where other piping is exposed. Hard drawn copper tubing shall be used where run exposed and either hard drawn or annealed where concealed. Only tool -made bends will be acceptable. Fittings for copper tubing shall be brass or copper solder -joint type, except at connections to apparatus, where brass compression -type fittings shall be used. Non-metallic tubing may be used in lieu of copper only inside control cabinets or for flexibility with short runs (24" maximum) to controls, and shall be virgin polyethylene, meeting stress -crack test ASTM D1693 -60T. Tubing shall be self -extinguishing under ASTM -D635 flammability test. Number -coded polyethylene shall be used inside control cabinets and shall be neatly tied and supported. Flexible connections bridging the cabinet and its door shall be neatly fastened along the hinge -side and protected against abrasion. ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM DESCRIPTION; System shall be Direct Digital Control (DDC) with electronic sensing elements and operated with pneumatic, electric or electric/hydraulic motors for actuators. DDC system shall include air unit controllers and equipment controllers with a network to a data processor all with PID algorithm capability. City of Lubbock will furnish one or more compatible PC computers, modems and a printer. The CDP shall be capable of logging any DDC sensing and/or control points and either printing or reporting data logs and trends by individual sensor, air unit or other equipment. +� Also, processor shall be capable of responding to modem requests rip 93008 ENO.MA for data logs and trends from local terminals in Lubbock, TX or other remote locations. Minimum points of control shall conform to the attached DDC point schedule. EMS system shall be equal to Johnson Metasys and shall be capable of communication with Metasys systems at Airport Terminal or Municipal Square or with Deltanet Honeywell system at the Memorial Civic Center. TEMPERATURE SENSORS: Temperature sensing elements shall be capable of sensing temperatures +/- .2°F with repeatability +/- 1% between 50°F and r 80°F. USE MAMAC TE -2112 TRANSDUCER OR APPROVED EQUAL. Sensing elements shall be platinum electronic resistance type with stainless steel probe. 24 Volt AC with 4-20 MA output. For piping furnish appropriate length temperature sensing bulbs for remote DDC control. DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSORS: Install sensitive differential pressure sensors on plate heat exchanger and on each new pump, for proving required minimum flow rate. Heat exchanger sensors shall be sensitive to ± .1" WC and equal to Orange Research manufacture. Differential pressure switches on pumps shall be sensitive to ±1' WC and equal to ASCO or Orange Research manufacture. THERMOSTATS• All existing space thermostats for propeller unit heaters not on DDC control may be reused if they are operational. New space thermostats for concourse and concessions shall be gradual acting type, except in cases specified herein to the contrary. All shall be adjustable as to set point and shall be guaranteed to control to plus or minus 1 degree F. of set point. They shall be electronic resistance type. For installation in finished areas furnish in plain case with concealed adjustments. SAFETY LOW LIMIT: Safety low limits shall be manual reset line voltage type with bellows actuated switches. Twenty foot capillary shall be responsive to the coolest section of its length. 15L-3 93008 CONTROL VALVES, WATER: All modulating straight -through water valves shall be provided with equal -percentage contoured throttling plugs. All three-way valves shall be provided with linear throttling plugs such that the total flow through the valve shall remain constant regardless of the valve's position. Valves 3" and smaller shall be screwed type, valves 4" and larger shall be flanged. Valves shall be factory -rated to withstand the pressures encountered. Valves shall have stainless-steel stems and spring-loaded teflon packing. Water valves shall be sized for a pressure drop equal to the coil they serve but not to exceed 5 psi. Valves shall have replaceable seats and discs. CONTROL VALVES, STEAM: Steam valves shall be high quality valves equipped with characterized throttling plugs to insure practically straight line gradual operation. Valves shall have stainless steel trim. Where coil loads exceed the capacity of a single 2" valve, two or more valves in parallel shall be used. In parallel arrangement, the smaller valve shall open first, with the larger valve beginning to open as the smaller valve reaches its full open position. AIR FLOW CONTROL DAMPERS: All new control dampers shall be types required by their service. Frames shall not be less than 13 gauge galvanized steel. Blades must not be over 8 inches wide nor less than .16 gauge galvanized steel roll formed. Bearings shall be oilite, ball bearing or nylon with 1/2" shafts. Side seals shall be stainless steel of the tight -seal spring type. Dampers and seals shall be suitable for temperature ranges of -400to 204°F. All new proportional control dampers shall be opposed or parallel blade type and two -position dampers shall be parallel -blade types. All new dampers shall be minimum leakage type to conserve energy and the manufacturer shall submit leakage and flow characteristic data for all control dampers with the temperature control submitted. Maximum leakage shall be 3% at static pressure of 3 inches of W.C. Control dampers shall be standard products of temperature control manufacturer. Local fabrication of dampers is not allowed. 15L-4 93008 PNEUMATIC ACTUATORS: Pneumatic operators shall be sized to operate their appropriate remote control valves with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two -position action as required. Where sequencing of actuators is called for such sequencing shall be accomplished by spring ranges adequate for the application. CONTROL PANEL: (City of Lubbock Coliseum) Each air unit, pump and exhaust fan will be controlled through HOA switches from the Motor Control Center. In the AUTO position, these units shall be capable of remote START/STOP from the Energy Management System (EMS). Locate a data terminal in the Operating Engineer's Office for connection to a PC with modem and printer furnished by the City of Lubbock. The PC will control the EMS and temperature regulation systems. The following functions shall be provided to the terminal: 1. Auditorium Chilled Water Plant: The existing condensing water pump, chilled water pump, cooling tower fan, and compressors shall be capable of START/STOP and by activating two position valves to divert the chilled water from the Auditorium air units to the Coliseum air units. Four "LEAD" air units, located on quarter points in the Coliseum shall be ON through an electrical interlock, when any chilled water pump is activated. These units do not have flow control valves. All other air units will be ON with their two position flow control valves OPEN when activated by time clock on separate channels as desired or needed. 2. Texas Tech University Chilled Water Plant: When either or both access valves on chilled water supply are activated ON by Texas Tech in CHACP #1, the corresponding chilled water pump or both shall be capable of START/STOP and by activating two position valves provide chilled water to the air units. LEAD air units in the Coliseum shall be ON through an electrical interlock, when any chilled water pump is activated. All other air units will be ON with their two position flow control valves OPEN when activated by time clock on separate channels as desired or needed. Provide and install a control panel constructed of 14 gage stainless steel, where directed by the Engineer/ Coliseum Operations Supervisor. The control panel shall have a locking hinged cover and contain the following: HAND/OFF/AUTOMATIC (HOA) switches for remote control of each air unit and exhaust fan in the Coliseum air conditioning system. In the AUTOMATIC position, the units shall be under control of the EMS system or the time clock. Furnish a Tork 15L-5 93008 The panel shall also include a pilot light for each fan to indicate operation and a pilot light for each chilled water pump to indicate operation. The panel shall also include an emergency switch for operating the SMOKE PURGE system. The panel shall also contain digital display of Chilled Water Flow in GPM and of Chilled Water Supply Temperature and Chilled Water Return Temperature. These readouts will receive 4 to 20 MA signals from the flow instrument in the Texas Tech University chilled water piping flow and temperature instruments. CONTROL CENTER CHACP #1: (Texas Tech University) Provide and install a control panel constructed of 14 gage stainless steel, where directed by the superintendent of Central Plants. The control panel shall have a locking hinged cover and contain the following: valve switch labeled 600 GPM, valve switch if labeled 1200 GPM, and one time clock to control each valve switch. Use Tork D100ST. The switches will be capable of remotely controlling the chilled water access valves in Vault #1. When ON by it's time clock, each valve shall open by its pneumatic actuator through an electric/pneumatic transducer. Each switch shall be capable of modulating it's valve to provide the flow desired by CHACP #1 operator. Digital display of flow by 4 to 20 MA signals from the flow meter in the chilled water supply line shall be indicated on the panel at all times. When OFF by its time clock, each valve shall close by its pneumatic actuator. Digital temperature indication from sensors in the chilled water supply and chilled water return piping to the Coliseum shall be displayed on the panel at all times by 4 to 20 MA signals from temperature sensors in the lines. PART III - EXECUTION ELECTRICAL INTERLOCKS:. All electrical interlocks shall be provided as specified. All electrical interlocks shall be made by means of motor starters or shall be accomplished by separate relays. No motor power lead shall be utilized in an interlock circuit. All interlocked starters with disconnect switches shall be provided with auxiliary contacts 15L-6 93008 K600 time clock to operate the units as scheduled. The six channels shall be as follows: 1. 5 East Air Units + 1 LEAD Air Unit 2. 5 West Air Units + 1 LEAD Air Unit 3. 4. 3 North Air Units + 1 LEAD Air 3 South Air Units + 1 LEAD Air Unit Unit 5. 4 Concourse Air Units 6. 2 Concession Air Units The panel shall also include a pilot light for each fan to indicate operation and a pilot light for each chilled water pump to indicate operation. The panel shall also include an emergency switch for operating the SMOKE PURGE system. The panel shall also contain digital display of Chilled Water Flow in GPM and of Chilled Water Supply Temperature and Chilled Water Return Temperature. These readouts will receive 4 to 20 MA signals from the flow instrument in the Texas Tech University chilled water piping flow and temperature instruments. CONTROL CENTER CHACP #1: (Texas Tech University) Provide and install a control panel constructed of 14 gage stainless steel, where directed by the superintendent of Central Plants. The control panel shall have a locking hinged cover and contain the following: valve switch labeled 600 GPM, valve switch if labeled 1200 GPM, and one time clock to control each valve switch. Use Tork D100ST. The switches will be capable of remotely controlling the chilled water access valves in Vault #1. When ON by it's time clock, each valve shall open by its pneumatic actuator through an electric/pneumatic transducer. Each switch shall be capable of modulating it's valve to provide the flow desired by CHACP #1 operator. Digital display of flow by 4 to 20 MA signals from the flow meter in the chilled water supply line shall be indicated on the panel at all times. When OFF by its time clock, each valve shall close by its pneumatic actuator. Digital temperature indication from sensors in the chilled water supply and chilled water return piping to the Coliseum shall be displayed on the panel at all times by 4 to 20 MA signals from temperature sensors in the lines. PART III - EXECUTION ELECTRICAL INTERLOCKS:. All electrical interlocks shall be provided as specified. All electrical interlocks shall be made by means of motor starters or shall be accomplished by separate relays. No motor power lead shall be utilized in an interlock circuit. All interlocked starters with disconnect switches shall be provided with auxiliary contacts 15L-6 93008 on the disconnect switch so that interlocking circuits are interrupted when the disconnect switch in thrown to the OFF position. This contractor shall submit wiring diagrams for his equipment which when approved will become installation drawings. These diagrams shall show all interlock circuits and shall relate such diagrams of internal wiring of equipment items as are furnished by the manufacturers of that equipment of the.system as a whole. SEQUENCE OF OPERATION: Coliseum Air Units: All 20 air units shall have outside air and return air dampers. When an air unit is ON, the outside air dampers shall be closed and the return air dampers shall be open unless a ventilation cycle is activated by outside air temperature, indoor air quality or smoke removal. When an air unit is OFF, the outside air dampers shall be closed. Outside air and return air dampers for air units ON shall operate in unison for ventilation cycles. LEAD air units (4) shall be provided with an outside air temperature sensor located at the outside air louver, a return air sensor located at the return air inlet and a mixed air temperature sensor. When outside air temperature is below 500F., the system shall bypass the plate heat exchanger to the Texas Tech University chilled water system and activate the converter and heating/cooling 3 -way changeover valve for heating. The outside air dampers on all activated air units shall modulate in unison to maintain the return air temperature at 75°F. unless the outside air dampers reach the minimum ventilation value set for indoor air quality or unless the outside air dampers are set a maximum for smoke removal. When the outside air temperature is above 600F., deactivate the converter and heating/cooling 3 -way changeover valve for heating and activate the plate heat exchanger to the Texas Tech University chilled water system or the Auditorium chilled water system for cooling. The temperature from any combination of sensors at the LEAD air units shall be used to control the three-way valve ahead of the chilled water pumps to maintain the return air temperature at 75°F. Indoor air quality can be controlled by ventilation through the six step ventilation switch. This switch will index the outside air intake in six steps interlocked with the six exhaust fans. The six steps shall be designated by Coliseum occupants. 1500 PEO, 3000 PEO, 4500 PEO, 6000 PEO, 7500 PEO, 9000 PEO. A carbon dioxide sensor will be located on the light bridge. By monitoring the intensity at the sensor or by observation, the Operating Engineer may index the ventilation switch. Should a pyrotechnic display cause smoke or engine exhaust cause smoke or fumes, emergency SMOKE PURGE will activate all exhaust fans to ON and OPEN all outside air dampers to maximum and bypass all smoke detector function for fan OFF switches. All air units shall have smoke detectors to meet NFPA requirements so that any detector sensing smoke will shut OFF all air units. A dust switch will close all outside air dampers. 1.5L-7 93008 ICHILLED WATER ACCESS: When the CHACP #1 operator wants to furnish access to chilled water for the Coliseum, he will activate Valve #1 (600 GPM) or Valve #2 (12 GPM) or both Valves (1800 GPM). The valves are activated through their separate time clocks for ON at an agreed time and OFF at an agreed time. Flow may be monitored visually through remote readout from a flow meter located downstream of valves. Time clocks and FLOW readouts are located in CHACP #1 control panel. Temperature in chilled water supply and return may also be monitored. Valves #1 and #2 shall be fully modulating under the control in CHACP #1. Time clocks may be eliminated by DDC control software in the system. TEMPERATURE CONTROL OF CHILLED WATER AT ACCESS TO TTU UTILITY: The two-way access valves installed in the Vault may throttle chilled water supply so that the temperature of the return chilled water can be controlled at 560F. TEMPERATURE CONTROL OF COLISEUM: By control of leaving chilled water temperature, the air leaving the Coliseum air units will be approximately at the apparatus dew point of the design conditions. Control of comfort conditions for both heating and cooling, will be through a three-way valve in the hot/chilled water piping ahead of the hot/chilled water pumps and the two position 3 -way changeover valve. COLISEUM AIR CONDITIONING: When Coliseum operator wants to cool the Coliseum, he can either access the Texas Tech University chilled water system by requesting chilled water from CHACP #1 or by starting up the Auditorium 46 chilled water system. Both systems cannot be operated simultaneously. For operation on a time clock Coliseum air units and exhaust fans are divided into 6 channels: 1. six air units on east side. 2. Six air units on west side. 3. Four air units on north side. 4. Four air units on south side. 5. Four air units on concourse. 6. Two air units at concessions. Each of the channels can be controlled on a separate time schedule. For example: Channels 1 and 2 can be ON with the Auditorium chillers to precool the Coliseum prior to a function requiring Texas Tech University chilled water for an evening function. The 40 93008 A& 15L-8 concourse could be ON when the TTU chilled water is available. Exhaust would be required until the people are seated and the event begins. One unit each on north, east, south and west are LEAD air units, interlocked with hot/chilled water pumps. Another example: Channels I through 4 could be operated with CHACP #1 on Valve #1 (600 GPM) for rapid precooling and/or a low attendance function. As the audience arrives Valve #2 (1200 GPM) could be added to handle the maximum load. Each air unit and exhaust fan must have a HAND/OFF/AUTO switch. In the HAND position, the unit will be ON. In the OFF position, the unit will be OFF. In the AUTO position, the unit will be under the control of the time clock or the EMS system as desired. Temperature sensors are available to keep the operator aware of conditions throughout the Coliseum. The units serving the Coliseum proper can be ON or OFF to suit the area where the audience is seated. Carbon dioxide sensor at the roof will make the operator aware of the requirement to sequence the exhaust fans and to increase the outside air supply. Outside air dampers must be activated with their respective air unit, but remain closed until the ventilation switch is increased. The ventilation switch will operate all of the outside air dampers in unison on air units in operation. The ventilation switch will have six steps based upon 1500, 3000, 4500, 6000, 7500 and 9000 occupants to open position of all outside air dampers. To maintain a positive air pressure in the Coliseum the exhaust fans must be operated in six steps with the dampers until all outside air dampers are 100% open before all exhaust fans are ON. All operations using time clocks and switches may be replaced by a DDC control software system. CONVERTER: There shall be an outside master thermostat with its sensitive element outdoors but protected from the sun, and a submaster thermostat with its sensitive element in the water circulating line. There shall be an automatic steam valve on the steam supply. When a hot water circulating pump is running, the master thermostat shall reset the control point of the submaster thermostat to control, by means of modulating the steam valve, the temperature of the water delivered by the pump in accordance with a fixed schedule. This schedule shall be a straight line relationship at a fixed ratio between outside temperature and water temperature drawn through the point of 0 degrees outside temperature and 180 degrees water temperature, and 70 degrees outside temperature and 70 degrees water temperature. 15L-9 AIR UNITS• Except for the four LEAD units, each unit shall have a hot/chilled water coil with 2 -way valve control. It will open when fan is ON. Dampers in the outside air inlet and the return air inlet to the unit shall be open return air when the unit is running and closed when the unit is off. The outside damper will be under control of the ventilation switch when unit is ON. The return damper will be linked to the outside air damper. Freezestat required on all air units with outside air supply. Smoke Detector: Refer to Division 16. END OF SECTION 15L-10 93008 SECTION 16A - RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS PART I - GENERAL NOTE• Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and supplemental Conditions. SUBMITTALS• Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. SCOPE. The work shall include furnishing and installing all rigid steel and flexible metallic conduit, intermediate metallic conduit, electrical metallic tubing, polyvinyl chloride conduit, wireways, pull and junction boxes and outlet boxes, together with all supporting devices and other accessories required. PART II - PRODUCTS UNDERGROUND DUCTS: Plastic electrical conduits and fittings, in strict accordance with the requirements of Western Underground Model Specification No. 3.1, PLASTIC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS. Conduits shall be Type EB for encased burial. Material shall be virgin polyvinyl chloride (PVC). Conduits shall be Carlon or equivalent. Rigid Steel Conduit: Rigid, threaded, thick -wall; galvanized inside and outside or galvanized outside with a protective coating inside; UL listed and labeled according to Standard UL6; conforming to ANSI Standard C80.1; Pittsburg, Republic Steel, Robroy or Allied. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Steel tubing, galvanized outside and provided with a slick corrosion resistant interior coating; UL listed and labeled according to Standard 797; conforming to ANSI Standard 080.3; Pittsburg, Republic Steel, Robroy or ,Allied. Intermediate Metallic Conduit (TMC): Rigid, threaded, thin wall steel; galvanized outside with protective coating inside; UL listed and labeled according to Standard 1242; Allied, Republic Steel, or equivalent. 16A-1 93008 14, Flexible Metal Conduit: Spirally wound with hot dip galvanized steel strips (commercial Greenfield); conforming to UL Standard UL 1 and UL listed and labeled; Triangle Conduit and Cable Company, or equivalent. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Spirally wound, galvanized steel strips, as for flexible metal conduit; with polyvinyl chloride cover extruded over the exterior to make conduit liquidtight; UL listed; Electri-flex type "LA" or equivalent. PVC Coated Steel Conduit: The conduit before coating shall conform to UL Standard UL6 and ANSI Standard 080.1. The conduit after coating shall meet NEMA Standard RN1-1974. The polyvinyl chloride coating shall be bonded to the galvanized outer surface of the conduit. The coating shall be a minimum of .020 inches (20 mil). A loose coupling shall have a PVC coating bonded to the outer surface with a PVC sleeve extending from both ends such that when the coupling and conduit are joined there shall be no exposed metal. Conduit shall be "Rob-Kote" as manufactured by Robroy Industries or 110cal-201' as manufactured by Occidental Coating Company. CONDUIT FITTINGS: Couplings and Terminations for Rigid Steel Conduit: Factory made steel threaded couplings; bushing at all boxes and cabinets, with lockouts inside and outside box or cabinet. Couplings and Terminations for Electrical Metallic Tubing: Join lengths of EMT with steel compression couplings. Attach EMT to boxes or cabinets with steel compression -type box connectors having an insulated throat with locknuts. Where grounding bushings are required at terminations, they shall be T & B Series 3802, or equivalent. Set screw type connectors or indent connectors will not be allowed. Couplings and Terminations for Intermediate Metal Conduit: Same as for rigid steel conduit. Couplings and Terminations for Flexible Metal Conduit: T & B 440 Series couplings at connections between flexible and rigid conduit; T & B 3110 or 3130 Series nylon insulated throat, steel connectors at box or cabinet terminations. Couplings and Terminations for Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: T & B 5271 Series adapters at connections between flexible and rigid conduit; T & B 5331 Series nylon insulated throat, steel connectors at box or cabinet terminations. 93008 16A-2 WIREWAYS• Interior Use: UL listed; enamel finished; sizes shown or required; screw covers; complete with all fittings, couplings, hangers and accessories; Square D, General Electric, or equivalent. Exterior Use: UL listed; enamel finished; sizes shown or required; removable front cover which is Basketed; weatherproof rainhood. OUTLET BOXES: UL listed of sizes and types specified. Sheet Steel Boxes: Sheet steel not lighter than No. 14 gauge, galvanized after fabrication; Raco, Steel City or Appleton. Cast Metal Boxes: Cast iron or cast alloy with threaded hubs; Crouse -Hinds, Appleton or Pyle National. PULL BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES:. Sheet steel, galvanized inside and outside, with galvanized covers. Small Boxes: For boxes where the volume required is not over 100 cubic inches, use standard outlet boxes. Larger Boxes: For boxes where the volume required is over 100 cubic inches, use cabinets as specified for panelboard cabinets with covers of same gauge as boxes, secured with corrosion resistant bolts or screws. PART III - EXECUTION EXCAVATION: Perform all excavation work required in connection with the installation of the work under this Division. After the electrical work has been installed, tested and approved, backfill all excavations with suitable material under the direction of the Architect. Include the cutting of all sidewalks, streets and other pavement and repairing the openings in them to return to the surface to approximately its original condition. Perform all excavations of every description of whatever substances encountered and to the depths required for installation of the work under this Division. During excavation, stack material suitable for backfilling in an orderly manner a sufficient distance from the banks of the trenches to prevent slides or cave-ins. Remove all excavated material not required or suitable for backfill, or waste as directed. Control 16A-3 93008 grading to prevent surface water from flowing into excavations and remove any water accumulating therein by pumping. Use open cut grading and make trenches of the necessary width for proper installation of the lines with banks as nearly vertical as possible. Grade the bottom of trenches accurately to provide uniform bearing and support for conduit or duct on undisturbed soil at every point along its entire length. Except at locations where excavation of rock from the bottoms of trenches is required, take care not to excavate below the depths required. Where rock excavation is required, remove the rock to a minimum overdepth of 4 inches below the trench depths specified. Backfill the overdepth rock excavation and all excess trench excavation to the proper level with 3/4 inch crushed rock or the equivalent in coarse gravel prior to the installation of conduit or ducts. Whenever wet or otherwise unstable soil that is incapable of properly supporting conduits or ducts is encountered in the trench bottom, remove such soil to a depth required and backfill the trench to trench bottom grade with 3/4 inch crushed rock or coarse gravel or other suitable material. I'MW BACKFILLING: Carefully backfill trenches with earth, sandy clay, sand and gravel, soft shale or other approved material free from large clods of earth or stone, deposited in thoroughly and carefully rammed 6 -inch layers. Do not use blasted rock, broken concrete or pavement, or large boulders as backfilling material. Settling the backfill with water will be permissible and will be a requirement when so directed. Re -open any trenches improperly filled or where settlement occurs to the depth required for proper compaction, then refill, mound over and smooth off. I� Backfill open trenches across roadways or other areas to be paved as specified above except that the entire depth of trench shall be backfilled in 6 -inch layers, each layer moistened and compacted to a density of not less than 95% Standard Proctor in such manner as to permit the rolling and compaction of the filled trench together with the adjoining earth to provide the required bearing value and permit paving of the area immediately after backfilling is completed. Along all other portions of the trenches, grade the ground to a reasonable uniformity and leave the mounding over the trenches in a uniform and neat condition. bw INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND DUCTS: Use plastic electrical ducts, installed with concrete encasement, with a minimum of 3" of concrete between ducts and earth, and with 2 inches of concrete between adjacent ducts. Concrete shall contain 93008 M 16A-4 a red dye additive to give a distinctive red color when concrete is cured. Provide at least 30 inches of cover from top of concrete encasement to finished grade. Install with uniform slope for ■�► drainage, with no low pockets to collect water. Build up duct banks completely in the trench before any concrete is poured, using factory -fabricated plastic conduit spacers in staggered configuration to provide the proper horizontal and vertical spacings, and securing the entire assembly with heavy twine or cord to insure rigidity during pouring. Do not use metal for this purpose. Assemble conduits with staggered adjacent couplings so that no two couplings will lie in the same transverse plane, in a vertical direction. Use solvent cement as directed by the duct manufacturer in making up all joints. Fabricate duct runs with standard factory -made fittings, elbows and accessories. Make all changes of direction, horizontal or vertical, with long sweep bends having a minimum radius of 25 feet, except that manufactured bends at or near the ends of the runs may be used on short runs of 100 feet or less. Make long sweep bends with one or more curved or straight sections of duct. Manufactured bends, where permitted, shall have a minimum radius of 10 times the nominal duct diameter. Where manufactured ducts of greater than a 30 degree angle are required, use rigid hot dipped galvanized steel conduit bends. During construction, protect partially completed duct lines from entrance of dirt and debris by means of suitable factory -made duct plugs. After completion of installation, seal all ends of spare ducts with factory made duct plugs. Where ducts enter in buildings, or turn up through equipment pads, change from plastic duct to rigid galvanized steel conduit below grade outside the structure, using suitable factory adapters. At the point of change of materials, extend the concrete envelope to enclose at least 2 feet of steel conduit. Wrap all steel conduits and fittings buried in earth as specified elsewhere herein, or use PVC coated steel conduits. Install the concrete envelope for a given duct run in one pour where possible. Use concrete of 3000 psi compressive strength. In pouring concrete, do not allow heavy masses of concrete to fall on ducts. Direct flow of concrete down sides of assembly to bottom, forcing it to flow to center of bank and then to rise up in middle, filling all spaces uniformly. Spade concrete liberally and carefully with a long, flat slicing bar between vertical rows to eliminate voids. Weight or brace the duct bank assembly if necessary, to prevent the assembly from floating. Because of the fact that plastic conduits may expand considerably during construction, each run and its concrete envelope shall be installed starting at one end and proceeding toward the other with any necessary adjustments to length being made at the end toward which the work is progressing. 16A-5 93008 After ducts are installed, complete with envelope, and before pulling any cable, pull a mandrel through every duct to check for alignment and clear passage. Use an iron -shod mandrel with a diameter of 1/4 inch less than the nominal size of the duct and a length equal to the duct diameter. Mandrel shall have a leather or rubber gasket slightly larger than the duct hole. After testing the ducts with the mandrel, pull a stiff -bristled brush through each duct until it is clear of all particles of earth, sand or gravel; then install duct plugs immediately. INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND STEEL CONDUIT: All steel conduit in earth shall be rigid galvanized steel conduit. Wrap such conduit with 3M Company 0.020 inch thick No. 51 "scotchrap" vinyl plastic tape, half lapped to give a double thickness wrap. Remove all oil, grease and dirt from conduit with a suitable solvent, and clean and dry conduit before wrapping. If conduit is pre -wrapped in the shop and then cut and joined on the job, wrap all joints on the job, overlapping pipe wrapping 3" on both sides of joints. 16A-6 93008 INSTALLATION OF PVC COATED CONDUITS: During installation, visually examine the conduit for cuts. Patch these areas with a paste containing a PVC solvent obtained from the conduit manufacturer. The patch shall be built up to the original thickness of the coating and feathered out on all sides of the damaged area a minimum of 1/2 inch to provide a complete bonded seal over the damaged area. INSTALLATION OF BUILDING RACEWAYS: All wiring of every description shall be run in conduit or electrical metallic tubing unless noted or specified otherwise. Conduits may be run exposed. All exposed runs shall be installed parallel to the surface of the building in a neat and orderly manner. Types: All conduits installed in tunnel shall be rigid galvanized steel conduits or IMC. Above grade interior conduits shall be rigid galvanized steel conduit, intermediate metal conduits or electrical metallic tubing. Conduits installed buried in earth shall be PVC or rigid galvanized steel. Sizes: Size and install raceways so that conductors may be drawn in without injury or excessive strain. Make field bends with approved bending devices. Do not install bends or offsets in which conduit is crushed, deformed or otherwise injured. 16A-6 93008 Connections: Use lengths of flexible metal conduit, not less than 12" long at final connections to all motors, controls and other devices subject to movement because of vibration or mechanical adjustment. In tunnel, and where installed outdoors, use liquidtight flexible metal conduit. Around Heat Producing Equipment: Do not install raceways within 3" of steam and hot water pipes, breeching and flues, except where crossings are unavoidable, and then keep raceways at least 11, from insulation on the pipe, breeching or flue crossed. Wherever possible, avoid installing raceways directly above or in close proximity to boilers and other like objects operating at high temperatures. Joining Rigid Conduits: Join with threaded couplings. Ream out all conduit ends after threading. Secure rigid conduits at panel boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, switchboards, support boxes, or sheet metal outlet boxes by galvanized locknuts, inside and outside, with insulating bushing inside. Unthreaded set screw type couplings or connectors are not acceptable in rigid conduit systems. No running threads shall be used anywhere in conduit systems. Protection of Raceways: Seal ends of all raceways with blank discs ("pennies"), push pennies or other approved closers during construction. Do not pull any conductors into raceways until all plastering in the vicinity is completed. Swab out all raceways before pulling in conductors. Penetrations: Wherever raceways pass through floors, walls partitions, etc., carefully fill any space between the outside of the raceway and the building material to prevent passage of air, water, smoke and fumes. Filling material shall be fire resistive and, in general, similar to the basic building materials through which the raceway passes. CONDUIT SUPPORTS: Support Spacing: Use minimum spacing as directed by National Electrical Code, but space hangers more closely where required by conditions. Individual Conduits: Support conduits running vertically or horizontally with galvanized malleable iron one hole clamps. Carry individually supported horizontal conduits 1-1/41' and larger on Kindorf No. 150 or Steel City No. C-149 hangers. Use no perforated strap iron as hanger material. Do not use any wire to support conduits or to attach conduits to supporting members. Multiple Conduits: Where multiple raceways are run horizontally at the same elevations, they may be supported on trapezes formed of sections of Unistrut angle iron or channels suspended on rods or 16A-7 93008 pipes. Size trapeze members including the suspension rods for the number size and loaded weight of the conduits they are to support. Space them as required for the smallest conduit supported. INSTALLATION OF OUTLET BOXES: Usage: Provide at each outlet or device of whatever character a metal outlet box in which conduits shall terminate. Boxes recessed in construction: Sheet steel boxes. Boxes for Exposed Work: Cast metal boxes. Boxes for Outdoors: Cast metal boxes with gasketed covers. INSTALLATION OF PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES: Sizing: Size all pull and junction boxes in accordance with NEC, using larger sizes than required by code where job conditions so indicate. Mounting: Fasten all boxes securely to the building construction, independent of conduit systems. On concealed conduit systems where boxes are not otherwise accessible, set box covers flush with finished surfaces for access. END OF SECTION 16A-8 93008 SECTION 16B - CONDUCTORS PART I - GENERAL NOTE• Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. SUBMITTALS• Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. SCOPE: The work shall include the furnishing of all conductors, together with all splices, connections, identification, bundling, etc., including pulling devices. PART II - PRODUCTS CONDUCTORS (600 VOLTS AND UNDER): Type: Soft drawn, annealed copper, UL listed, rated at 600 volts, continuous without weld, splice or joint, uniform cross-section, free from flaws, scale and other imperfections; Okonite, Triangle, Anaconda or Simplex. No. 8 and larger shall be stranded; No. 10 and smaller shall be solid. Insulation: Branch circuits shall have type TW, THW, or THWN insulation unless the type is specifically designated or specified. Service feeders shall be type THW or THWN. Feeder circuits shall be Type THW or THWN. Circuits Subjected to High Temperatures: Type RHH conductors for wiring in proximity to boilers, and for motors and devices subject to high temperature because of high ambient temperature or convection or radiant heat. Lighting Fixture Conductors: Type and size approved by the NEC for the purpose. JOINTS AND SPLICES: Stranded Copper Conductors: UL approved solderless bolted pressure connectors or Thomas and Betts Series 54000 compression connectors. All connectors shall be of proper sizes to match conductor sizes. All compression connectors shall be applied with properly sized dies and tools. Split -bolt connectors are not acceptable. 16B-1 93008 Solid Copper Conductors: UL approved solderless bolted pressure connectors; or UL approved electrical spring connectors of "Scotchlok", Ideal or T & B "Piggy" make. All connectors shall be of proper sizes to match conductor sizes. COLOR CODING: Phase conductors shall be black, red and blue for phases, A, B, and C respectively in the 208 volt system. 4W Neutral conductors shall be white. Grounding conductors shall be green. PART III - EXECUTION WIRE PULLING: Wire Pulling: Provide suitable installation equipment for pulling conductors into raceways or conduits. Use ropes of polyethylene, nylon or other suitable material to pull in conductors. Attach pulling lines to conductors by means of woven basket grips or by pulling eyes attached directly to conductors. All conductors to be installed in a single conduit shall be pulled in together. Pull no conductors into conduits until all work of a nature which may cause injury to conductors is completed. Use an Underwriters' listed cable pulling compound where necessary. Cable Lubricants: All cable lubricants shall be UL listed, and shall be certified by their manufacturer to be non -injurious to the insulation on which they are used. Pulling Devices in Empty Raceways: Provide in every empty raceway, not containing conductors to be installed by this Contractor, a to suitable pull line to facilitate future installation of wiring. Lines shall be free from splices and shall have ample exposed length at each end. Identify each end of each line with a linen tag bearing complete information as to the purpose of the raceway and the location of its other end. All lines shall be nylon or polyethylene cord with a tensile strength not less than 200 pounds. INSTALLATION OF BUILDING WIRE (600 VOLTS AND UNDER): Feeders: Run all feeders their entire length in continuous pieces without joints or splices, insofar as practicable. Make joints in branch circuits only where circuits divide as shown on drawings. Sizes: No wire shall be smaller than No. 12 except for signal or control circuits, and except for individual lighting fixture taps as permitted by the National Electrical Code. 16B-2 93008 joints and Splices: Make joints and splices only where necessary _ and only at outlet boxes and pull boxes. All joints shall be mechanically and electrically secure. Conductor splices in wet locations shall be made in accordance with the conductor manufacturer's recommendations. Identifying Tags: Non-ferrous; stamped to clearly identify each circuit. securely fasten tags to all cables, feeders and power circuits in pull boxes, lighting, power and distribution panelboards, etc. Bundling Conductors: Bundle all conductors in panelboards, cabinets and the like, using marlin twine lacing or nylon straps made for the purpose. Bundle conductors larger than No. 10 in individual circuits. Bundle smaller conductors in larger groups. END OF SECTION 16B-3 93008 � I � I l'. J SECTION 16C - WIRING DEVICES PART I - GENERAL NOTE• Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. SUBMITTALS• Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. SCOPE• Furnish and install in suitable outlet boxes, the wiring devices indicated, complete with lamps, coverplates, etc. All shall be properly connected to conductors so as to be operable. PART II - PRODUCTS WIRING DEVICES• Acceptable Manufacturers: The catalog numbers listed herein are generally of Hubbell manufacture. Equivalent devices of Arrow -Hart, Bryant, Pass, Seymour and Leviton or General Electric are also acceptable. Classification: All wiring devices shall be "Specification Grade", and shall be UL listed. Colors: All devices shall have an ivory finish. WALL SWITCHES: For loads not exceeding 1500 watts at 120 volts: DEVICE HUBBELL CATALOG NO. Single pole wall switch 1201 or 1201-I Three-way wall switch 1203 or 1203-I Four-way wall switch 1204 or 1204-I Pilot -lighted switch 1201 -PLC Momentary Contact switch 1556 or 1556-I RECEPTACLES• b Receptacle with Self -Contained Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter: Hubbell No. GF -5262. I" 93008 16C-1 COVERPLATES• Provide coverplates for all wiring devices, telephone, signal outlets and other kindred devices. For Surface Mounted Devices: Zinc -coated sheet metal with rounded or beveled edges, of same size as boxes, for indoor use; cast alloy plates with gaskets for outdoor use. PART III - EXECUTION CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION: At each wiring device, install a label on the inside of the coverplate which shall identify the panel and circuit number to which the device is finally connected. The labels shall be made on the job with indent type Dynamo adhesive tape. Attach the label to the plate with contact cement or other suitable adhesive material. In lieu of a label, the panel and circuit number may be marked on the inside of the coverplate with an indelible pencil. END OF SECTION 16C-2 93008 SECTION 16D - ELECTRICAL SERVICE PART I - GENERAL NOTE• Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and the Supplemental Conditions. SUBMITTALS: Submit for review catalog data and drawings for all equipment items proposed for use under this Section. SCOPE: This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, material and equipment for the complete electrical service from the power company service point to the building service entrance equipment. INTERRUPTION OF SERVICE: Do not interrupt the existing electrical service until the new service is installed. Locate the existing underground feed to the building and mark its location in the vicinity of digging operations. Caution the other workers as to the location of the service. Any service interruptions necessary in parts of the building for change over to the new service shall be done only with permission of the owner. Submit requests for power interruptions to the owner 48 hours in advance of when needed. PART II - PRODUCTS UNDERGROUND DUCTS: As specified under RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS. SECONDARY SERVICE CONDUCTORS: As specified under CONDUCTORS. SERVICE CONNECTIONS: The Power Company will provide and install a pad -mounted transformer assembly where shown. Provide and install a reinforced concrete pad for the transformer of the size and configuration as directed by the Power Company. Furnish and install service entrance conductors in conduit from the building, underground to the transformer assembly. Leave sufficient slack in the conductors at the transformer to facilitate connections by the Power Company. 16D-1 93008 METERING• All metering for Power Company billing will be done by metering equipment furnished and installed by the Power Company in the pad -mounted transformer housing. SYSTEMS OF WIRING: Electrical Service: Combined 208Y/120 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire, 60 Hz. service for lighting and power. LOAD BALANCING: The contractor shall carefully balance his electrical loads between the various phases. When the facilities are under use at their heaviest loading periods, tests shall be run on the "hot" conductors in each feeder to a panel and any unbalances shall be corrected to a point that no conductor load shall be more than 5% high or low (maximum unbalance of 10%) in amperes. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING: As specified under RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS. INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND DUCTS: Install as specified under RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS. INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND STEEL CONDUIT: under RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS. INSTALLATION OF PVC COATED STEEL CONDUIT: under RACEWAYS AND FITINGS. END OF SECTION 16D-2 93008 Install as specified Install as specified SECTION 16E - GROUNDING PART I - GENERAL NOTE- Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. SUBMITTALS• Submit manufacturer's data on all products. SCOPE- Furnish and install the various grounding systems outlined herein in accordance with the National Electrical Code. PART II - PRODUCTS Products for grounding systems are specified elsewhere herein. PART III - EXECUTION SERVICE AND EOUIPMENT GROUNDING: Provide adequate and permanent service neutral and equipment grounding in accordance with the National Electrical Code, and subject to the following additional requirements. Connect the service ground and equipment ground to a common point within the metallic enclosure containing the main service disconnecting means. From the common point of connection of the service ground and equipment ground, run in conduit a combined service and equipment grounding conductor without joint or splice to the main water service pipe and connect it thereto with an approved bolted pressure clamp. Clean all contact surfaces thoroughly before connection, to assure good metal to metal contact. Bond the conduit to the grounding conductor at each end. Supplement the water pipe ground with an additional electrode which shall be 10' long by 3/4 inch diameter copperclad steel ground rod. Attach the electrode to the water pipe and to the service/ equipment grounding conductor. Size grounding conductors in accordance with National Electrical Code Tables 250-94 and 250-95. The building structural steel frame shall be grounded to the building service grounding electrode, using the conductor size specified in National Electrical Code Section 250-94(a).. 16E-1 93008 GROUNDING RACEWAYS: Assure the electrical continuity of all metallic raceway systems, pulling up all conduits and/or locknuts wrench tight. Where expansion joints or telescoping joints occur, provide bonding jumpers. Where flexible metallic conduit is employed, provide a green -insulated grounding jumper installed in the flexible conduit. Install a separate green -insulated conductor in each non-metallic conduit. Provide grounding bushings on all service and feeder raceways terminating within switchboards, motor control centers, panelboards, cabinets, and all other enclosures. Provide grounding conductors from such bushings to the frame of the enclosure and to the ground bus or equipment grounding strap. size grounding conductors in accordance with NEC Table 250-95. EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS: Provide a separate, green -insulated copper grounding conductor, with insulation of the same rating as phase conductors, for each feeder and for each branch circuit indicated. Install the grounding conductor in the same raceway with the related phase and neutral conductors, and connect the grounding conductor to pull boxes or outlet boxes at intervals of 100 feet or less. Where paralleled conductors in separate raceways occur, provide a grounding conductor in each raceway. Connect all grounding conductors to bare grounding bars in panelboards, and to ground buses in service equipment to the end that there will be an uninterrupted grounding circuit from the point of a ground fault back to the point of connection of the equipment ground and system neutral. Size all of these grounding conductors per NEC Table 250-95. END OF SECTION 16E-2 93008 i I E__3 SECTION 16F -- ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION PART I - GENERAL NOTE: Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements and Supplemental Requirements. SUBMITTALS: Provide complete catalog data and drawings on all items of equipment. MiHlons Provide all labor, material, equipment, and service necessary for and incidental to the complete electrical distribution system. PART II - PRODUCTS SWITCHBOARD: General: Furnish and install the switchboard as herein specified and shown on the associated electrical drawings. The switchboard shall meet Underwriters' laboratories requirements and be furnished with an Underwriters' Laboratories service entrance label. Structures: The switchboard shall be totally enclosed, dead front, free standing, front and rear aligned with front accessibility only required. The switchboard shall be Type 1 General Purpose. The framework shall be of UL gauge steel and secured together to support all cover plates, bussing and component devices during shipment and installation. Formed removable closure plates shall be used on the front, rear and sides. All closure plates are to be single tool, screw removable. Ventilation shall be provided when required. Each section shall include a single -piece removable top plate. Finish: All painted parts shall be pretreated and provided with a corrosion -resistant, UL Listed acrylic baked paint finish. The paint color shall be #49 medium light gray per ANSI standard 255.1-1967. Fault Withstandability: The entire switchboard shall be suitable for operation at the specified available fault current. The switchboard shall be labeled to indicate the maximum available 16F-1 93008 fault current rating, taking into account the structure, bussing, switchboard main disconnects) shall not be less than than the fault current rating shown on the drawings. The switchboard branch circuit devices short circuit current rating shall be fully rated or determined by UL labeled series connected ratings. Bussing: The switchboard through -bus shall be tin-plated copper. The switchboard bussing shall be of sufficient cross sectional area to meet UL Standard 891 for temperature rise. The through bus shall have a maximum ampacity of 1600 amperes and extend the full length of the switchboard. The through -bus shall be 100% rated. Provisions shall be provided for future splicing of additional sections from either end. The neutral bus shall be 100% rated. The switchboard distribution section bus shall be of the same material as the through bus. The distribution section neutral plate shall be of copper provided with Cu/Al lugs for the devices installed and future specified devices. The ground bus shall be sized per UL Standard 891 and of the same material as the through bus. Main Disconnect Devices: The main disconnect device shall be a fused bolted pressure switch. Fuses for the bolted pressure switch are to be supplied by the manufacturer. A voltmeter and ammeter shall be mounted in the door and supplied with the appropriate transformers and selector switches as required. Group Mounted Branch Devices: The switchboard group -mounted circuit breaker branch devices are to be totally front accessible and front connectable. The circuit breaker connections to the distribution panel bussing shall be of a "blow -on" design such that the connections grip the bus bars firmly under high -fault conditions. Shipping Splits: Switchboards shall be separated into shipping blocks. Each switchboard section shall be capable of being handled individually with the use of removable lifting bars or rollers and be clearly labeled with proper handling procedures. Switchboard sections shall be capable of being joined at the job site with the use of internal splice bars. These splices bars shall be preassembled onto the through bus and not shipped loose in a splice bars shall utilize two bolts, one on each side of the shipping split, for each phase. Conical washers shall be used to provide a constant pressure once the proper torque is achieved. The through bus splice connection shall be capable of being 16F-2 maintained by the use of a single tool and shall be front accessible. PANELBOARDS: Panelboard Cabinets: Furnish and install cabinets to serve the various panelboards, of sizes as required to house the panelboards. CABINET CONSTRUCTION: Rigidly constructed of sheet steel of gauges conforming to Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. requirements; corners overlapped or welded; edges turned over to receive trim. Cabinet Fronts: Cut from single sheet of not less than No. 12 gauge cold rolled sheet steel; fastened in place by adjustable trim clamps which will allow plumbing; same size as the cabinet box if surface mounted; size to overlap the box a minimum of 3/4" on all r sides if flush mounted. Provide each door with a substantial flush, ` cylinder tumbler lock and catch. On doors more than 48" high provide a combination three point catch and lock with T -handle. Provide each lock with two keys, with all locks keyed alike. Finish: All back boxes galvanized; all exposed metal, including fronts, primed and finished in gray lacquer. PANELBOARDS, GENERALLY: Mount all panelboards in cabinets as specified hereinbefore, arranged for flush or surface mounting as indicated on drawings. Where a circuit protective device is scheduled as a "spare", provide the device complete for operation. Where such a device is scheduled as a "space" or "space only", provide proper space and all necessary connectors for future installation of the size of r device scheduled. Where a breaker or switch is scheduled to serve a "future" load, provide the device complete for operation. 4W All circuit breakers shall be quick make, quick break, trip free, thermal magnetic, indicating type unless noted otherwise. Provide all multiple pole breakers with common trip and single operating handle; handle ties between breakers are unacceptable. Branch circuit breakers shall be fully interchangeable without disturbing adjacent units. lip Connect all circuit interrupting devices with sequence phasing. aw 410 93008 16F-3 Provide each panelboard with a neatly typewritten directory of circuits mounted in a cardholder on the inside of the panelboard cabinet. Cover directory with transparent sheet plastic. All panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. Submit shop drawings of each panelboard for review before commencing fabrication; drawings shall indicate number, size, interrupting rating and type of circuit protective devices; dimensions, gauges and type of construction of cabinets, size and material of main bus and lugs, and any other pertinent information necessary to determine compliance with the drawings and specifications. Provide each panelboard with a factory engraved nameplate which shall identify the panelboard name. DISCONNECT SWITCHES: Unless otherwise noted or required, all disconnect switches shall be UL listed and shall meet NEMA Standard KS1-1969 for Type HD heavy duty switches. Switches shall be unfused unless noted otherwise; quick make, quick break; in NEMA SR enclosures if exposed to the weather; elsewhere in NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures unless special enclosures are required. All motor circuit switches shall be horsepower rated. Switches shall be of General Electric, Square D, Westinghouse or ITE manufacture, equivalent to General Electric Type TH quick make, quick break switches. Where space does not permit use of the above specified switches, such as within weatherproof fan housings, etc., use suitable horsepower rated tumbler switches as unfused disconnects; General Electric Type RB or equivalent. Where disconnect switches are used to disconnect starters, provide auxiliary poles in switches as required to disconnect all auxiliary control circuits in starters. FUSES: Furnish and install all fuses necessary for leaving the installation complete and in working order, including a complete set of fuses in each spare switch. Upon completion of the work provide a standard carton (but not less than 3 fuses where a carton does not contain as many as 3) of each 16F-4 size of each type of fuse used. These spare fuses are in addition to fuses in spare switches and replacement fuses blown during construction and testing. Place a fuse identification label, showing type and size of the required fuses, inside the door of each enclosure requiring fuses. Fuses shall conform to the latest NEMA Standards, and shall be UL listed and labeled. Voltage ratings shall be suitable for the systems to which the fuses are applied. Fuses shall be of the classes and types listed below, the type designations referring to those indicated on the plans. rr END OF SECTION 16F-5 93008 1. Type KRP-C: Class limiting with time L; Bussman Type KRP-C "Hi -Cap", current delay, interrupting rating of 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes, current rating 601-4000 amperes. 2. Type FR: Class K5 or K9; Bussman Type FRN or FRS "Fusetrons". Fuses shall be available in rating 0-600 amperes, shall be dual element time delay type, and shall have interrupting Aa rating of 100,000 or 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes. rr END OF SECTION 16F-5 93008 SECTION 16G - LIGHTING PART I - GENERAL NOTE• Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. SUBMITTALS• Submit for review catalog data and drawings on all equipment items. SCOPE:. This section pertains to all labor, material, equipment and services necessary for and incidental to the complete lighting system as shown on the drawings and specified herein. PART II - PRODUCTS INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES: Provide and install a lighting fixture on each and every lighting outlet shown. Furnish fixtures in accordance with the designations on the drawings and as specified herein. Should any designations be omitted on the drawings, furnish fixtures of the same type as used in rooms of similar usage. All features specified or scheduled for fixtures shall be provided, even if the catalog number given in the specifications or schedule lacks the required numerals, prefixes or suffixes corresponding to the features called for. Fixtures: All lighting fixtures shall bear the label of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. Furnish scale drawings, catalog data, samples of finish, distribution curves, and any other data required by the Architect for every type fixture. Energy Saving Ballasts: All 2 lamp, 40 watt, rapid start ballasts shall be energy saving ballast. The ballast shall be high power factor, UL labeled, Class P with automatic reset features and "A" sound rating. Lamps: Fully equip each fixture with a full set of new lamps at the completion and acceptance of the work; lamps shall be of the best grade, and of the sizes and types specified; General Electric, Westinghouse or Sylvania. Incandescent Lamps: Inside frosted unless specified or recommended otherwise by the fixture manufacturer. 16G-1 93008 IFluorescent Lamps: Standard Cool White. IEND OF SECTION I � I � I u I I I I 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 16G-2 93008 SECTION 16H - MOTORS AND EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND WIRING PART I - GENERAL NOTE: Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, the Special Conditions and the General Requirements. SUBMITTALS• Submit manufacturer's data and drawings on all equipment items. SCOPE• This Section of the Specifications pertains to all other labor, material, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to motor and equipment wiring and control as shown on the drawings and/or as specified herein. PART II - PRODUCTS MOTORS• All motors will, unless otherwise noted, be furnished under other Divisions of the specifications, or will be furnished by the Owner. Where motors are mounted integrally with items of equipment, they will be erected in place with such equipment ready for electrical connection; such erection is not a part of the work under this Division. Where motors are to be installed as separate items, their foundations, anchor bolts and other provisions necessary to their erection will be provided as a part of the work of the Division under which they are furnished; their erection and final setting are a part of the work of this Division, and shall be done by specially skilled millwrights or similar craftsmen. MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS: Furnish motor control centers as shown, scheduled and specified of General Electric, Square D or Westinghouse manufacture. Classification: Class I, Type A per NEMA, Publication "Industrial Control No. ICI -1965, Part 22." Construction: Totally enclosed, adequately ventilated, free-standing, self-supporting; consisting of structures bolted together to form a continuous unit divided into compartmented sections, each separated by steel barriers; NEMA 3R enclosure: with doors arranged for padlocking. Units shall be front mounted only, against a wall. 16H-1 93008 suitable for installation I Entire assembly shall be anchored to two 4 -inch channel iron sills leveled and grouted flush into the top of a 6 -inch high concrete base. Finish: All hardware provided with suitable protective finish. All metal surfaces chemically cleaned and treated to provide bond between paint and metal; entire outer surface of board and pullbox primed and then factory painted two coats of gray lacquer. Buses: Hard drawn, 98 percent conductivity copper, Grade EC flat rectangular bars, with all connections bolted or welded; all contact surfaces of buses silver plated. Vertical buses in each section, 300 amperes capacity. Horizontal main buses as scheduled. Braced for 421000 amperes RMS symmetrical. Continuous ground bus extending through and connected to each section. Incoming Line Compartment: Incoming feeder shall be cable as scheduled, terminating in terminal compartment. Control Units: Mount components on draw -out assembly, properly guided by tracks or guide rails. Each unit shall be capable of being locked in the plug-in position or in a withdrawn and disconnected position. Units over 3 space units high may be bolt -in type. Provide door interlocks to prevent opening door unless unit is turned off, and to prevent energizing a control unit with its door open. Provide suitable screwdriver "defeater" mechanism to allow bypassing of interlock mechanism. Starter units shall be combination starter and molded case circuit breaker units. Provide pushbutton stations, pilot lights and hand -off -automatic switches as scheduled on drawings. Provide auxiliary contacts on starters to accomplish interlocks and control as specified in Division 15 or as noted elsewhere. Starter disconnecting means shall have auxiliary contacts to disconnect all control circuits when the starter is disconnected. Provide all three phase starters with three overload elements, one per phase. Equip each starter unit with a control power transformer, with 120 volt secondary, a secondary fuse in one leg and the other secondary leg grounded. 16H-2 93008 Identification: Provide adjacent to each protective device and control unit a laminated, white core, beveled edge plastic engraved nameplate designating the function of the device. Shop Drawings: Submit for review before beginning fabrication; indicate dimensions, type and gauge of materials; methods of construction; number, type, size and characteristics of all protective devices, starters, etc.; number, size, type and arrangement of all buses; rating of bus bracing; any other data needed to determine compliance with specifications and drawings. TEMPERATURE CONTROLS: Completely connect for operation all items for temperature controls which require electrical connections, furnishing all wiring, conduit and labor. 1 END OF SECTION 16H-3 93008 SECTION 16I - SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM FOR FAN SHUTDOWN PART I - GENERAL QUALIFICATIONS: The installing contractor shall be the authorized representative of the fire alarm manufacturer to sell, install and service the manufacturer's equipment. The installing contractor shall have on their staff an installation superintendent who is licensed with the State Fire Marshall's office for such purpose and under whose supervision installation shall take place. The fire alarm installation firm will have factory trained personnel performing the control panel wiring for the system that they were trained for. The firm shall also maintain a stock of parts and components used in the system. MANUALS• Provide three sets of operation and maintenance manuals which includes: 1. Complete typewritten operating instructions. 2. Wiring diagrams for the control panel with all terminals identified. 3. A parts list for the system identifying the components with ordering numbers. 4. A plan showing conduit size, number and size of conductors and locations of all devices. CODES AND STANDARDS: The installation and testing shall be made under the provisions of the latest National Electrical Code (NFPA-70). NFPA 71, NFPA 72A, NFPA 72B, NFPA 72C, NFPA 72D, NFPA 72E, NFPA 72F, NFPA 72G, NFPA 72H, UL Standards (1480, 864, 268, 268A, 217, 521, 228, 464, 1638, 38, 346, 1481), and all other applicable state and local codes and ordinances. The Contractor shall submit the new fire alarm equipment layout to the local fire alarm authority having jurisdiction for approval. SCOPE• The Contractor shall furnish and install and place in operating condition a 24 VDC, closed circuit, electrically supervised, zone annunciated fire alarm and detection system as specified herein. 11 11 93008 It is the intent to obtain a complete system which shall operate as described herein, and all equipment necessary for such operation shall be provided whether or not each item is enumerated herein or described on the drawings. The system shall include, but not be limited to, all control panels, power supplies, signal initiating devices, audible and visual alarm devices, conduit, wire, fittings and all other accessories required to provide a complete and operable system. The system shall operate as a non -coded, continuous sounding system. The system initiating circuits shall be wired as Style B (Class B) supervised circuits. QUALITY• All equipment, materials, accessories, devices, and other facilities covered by this specification or noted on contract drawings and installation specifications shall be of the best suited for the intended use and shall be provided by a single manufacturer or, if provided by different manufacturers, recognized as compatible by both manufacturers. All equipment and material shall be new and unused, unless directed otherwise. Wiring: All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electric Code, local codes and the National Fire Protection Association -70, Article 760. The minimum wire sizes shall be 12 gauge for AC power supply connections and auxiliary circuits, 14 gauge for DC power supply connections, 14 gauge for audible alarm circuits and 14 gauge for conventional initiating devices (smoke detectors, etc.). Wire shall be UL listed for limited energy (300V) and fire alarm applications and shall be installed in conduit. TESTING, GUARANTEE,SERVICE: A factory trained technical representative of the manufacturer shall perform the final connections, complete system checkout and testing of the system, and it shall be subject to the final acceptance and approval of the engineer and local authorities. Upon completion and acceptance, the owner and/or his representative (s) shall be instructed in the proper use of the system. A written copy of the final system test and checkout shall be provided detailing the function of each device. Furnish the Owner, Architect, Engineer and all authorities having jurisdiction a Certificate of Compliance. COORDINATION: It shall be the responsibility of the installing contractor to coordinate all requirements surrounding installation of the Fire Alarm System with all trades including, but, not exclusive of: 16I-2 93008 electrical contractor, and HVAC controls contractor. Adequate coordination shall be provided to insure proper installation and interface to all peripheral items required to interact with the Fire Alarm System to provide a complete and functional system. DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM: The Fire Alarm and Detection System shall be a single integrated system by a single manufacturer. The Contractor shall assume sole responsibility for its operation. The fire detection portion of the system shall consist of a total of four (4) zones and shall contain all power supplies, relays, modules and batteries as required for the operation described herein. All components of the system shall be fully supervised. DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION: Operation of manual or automatic initiating device shall cause the following events to occur: 1. The System Alarm LED shall light. 2. A local sounding device in the panel shall be activated. 3. The appropriate zone alarm indication shall appear on the fire control panel. ! 4. An evacuation tone shall sound on all alarm horns and all visual strobes shall flash. When a trouble condition is detected by one of the system initiating circuits, the following functions shall immediately occur: �I s 1. The System Trouble LED shall flash. 2. A local sounding device in the panel shall be activated. CONTROL PANEL• The fire alarm control panel shall provide four signal initiating zones. The panel shall utilize solid state electronics throughout and shall be annunciated with light emitting diodes (LEDs). A green pilot LED shall annunciate system operation from main ac power. Trouble on the system shall be annunciated by a yellow common trouble LED and shall cause a buzzer in the panel to sound. An alarm signal from any of the initiating loops shall be annunciated by the appropriate red zone (alarm) LED for that zone and shall cause the sounding of the general alarm. An LED test feature shall be provided. The initiating loops shall be of the locking, Style B (Class B) type, compatible with both two- and four -wire smoke detectors as well as other automatic and manual 93008 Ib 161-3 detecting devices. Each loop shall be capable of supporting up to 20, two -wire smoke detectors. The panel shall have both an alarm indicating device loop (Style Y, Class B) and a second output loop, the latter useable with either a releasing device or a local energy master box circuit. The panel shall also have a reverse polarity transmitter. An integral charging circuit for gelled electrolyte batteries shall be included, along with provision for mounting batteries in the panel. Three sets of Form C (SPDT) dry relay contacts shall be included in the panel circuitry: one actuated upon alarm signals, one actuated upon trouble signals, for the signaling of appropriate devices, and one actuated upon ac failures. Saddleclamp screw terminals shall be utilized for all field wiring connections in the panel. Provision for silencing alarms shall be included in the panel. one of the zones shall be selectable, at the time of installation, for nonsilenceable operation when used with waterflow detectors. The panel shall comply with NEPA Standards 72 and shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. The panel shall be a Notifier SGL -404 or equivalent. The control panel system shall have a power supply or supplies having sufficient power capabilities, and with their various outputs properly distributed and utilized, such that the system shall meet all applicable provisions of the NFPA 72 Standard appropriate to this installation and all requirements of Underwriters Laboratories pertaining to power supplies and their installation. When this system is fully installed and before it is turned over to the owner/user as being fully operational, it shall have been operated at full power in the manner and for the period described in the manufacturer's instruction manual as the "Full Power Test". BATTERY CHARGER• Capability shall be provided to recharge sealed gelled cell batteries to their full capacity. Loss of main operating power to the system shall automatically cause the system to transfer to battery power. After main power has been restored and the emergency batteries have been restored and the emergency batteries have been fully recharged the system shall continue to float charge the batteries. The module shall be fitted with a fuse to protect against battery overcurrent and accidental reversal of polarity. The charger shall be placement supervised and shall be Underwriters Laboratories Inc. listed. The system batteries shall be sealed gelled cell and shall be installed in the control panel enclosure. The batteries shall provide 24 volt DC for system operation and shall be sized in accordance with NFPA 72A. 16I-4 93008 SMOKE DETECTOR BYPASS: Events occur in this building which generate smoke, making it necessary to bypass the unit smoke detectors. Provide and install, adjacent to the fire alarm panel a key - operated, 2 -position switch labeled "SMOKE DETECTOR BYPASS/SMOKE EVACUATION". The positions on the switch shall be labeled "Normal" and "Bypass". In the normal position, a green pilot light on the switch shall light, and the controls shall be connected through the fire alarm panel such that, if any detector goes into alarm, all air units shall shut down until the alarmed detector is cleared and the system reset. On the "Bypass" position, a red pilot light on the switch shall light, the trouble light on the fire alarm panel shall light, all fresh -air dampers in the arena shall go fully open, all air units in the arena shall start, and all exhaust fans in the arena shall start. AUTOMATIC AIR DUCT DETECTOR: Automatic Air Duct Detectors shall provide detection of combustion gases and smoke in air conditioning ducts in compliance with the National Fire Protection Association, Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems, NFPA 90A. The detector shall operate at air velocities ranging from 500-3500 feet per minute without requiring compensation for operation at specified air velocities. Sampling tubes of sufficient length shall be provided so that the sampling tube can be cut to exact length at the installation site to match duct width at the installed location. The detector shall be capable of functioning in conjunction with the fire detection system control equipment to shut down the air handling devices via the fire detection system control equipment. Two -wire interconnection to the control equipment in Style B (Class B) supervisory configurations shall be used. Power shall be derived form the system control unit. The detector housing shall be equipped with an integral mounting base capable of accommodating ionization detector heads. The housing shall be equipped with a transparent viewing port which shall permit viewing of detector head Alarm/Power-On indicator at viewing angles up to 80 degrees off normal and inspection of cleanliness conditions inside the detector head mounting chamber. The detector indicator shall blink intermittently during standby conditions and shall glow red during alarm conditions. The duct detector housing shall be painted steel and shall contain three knock -outs. Gaskets shall be provided to seal the openings where the sampling tube and return tube enter the duct. A template shall be provided for locating the necessary holes in the duct. Terminal connections suitable for connection of 12-18 AWG wiring shall be provided. The 16I-5 93008 Automatic Air Duct Detector shall be Fenwal Model DH -22 equipped with a Fenwal CPD -7021 Series Ionization Smoke Detector, or equal, and shall be Underwriters Laboratories Inc. listed. on the wall below the unit, there shall be a remote alarm indicator/Key switch for each duct detector. They shall be Fenwal RCM -500 and labeled appropriately to indicate which duct detector they serve. AIR HANDLING UNIT SHUTDOWN RELAY: Air Handling Unit Shutdown Relays shall be installed in each air handling unit's control circuit. Relays shall be de -energized to shut down AHU equipment from the fire detection control system. Operating voltage shall be 24 volt D.C. Cabinet construction shall be die formed cold rolled 16 gauge steel with screw --type cover. Finish shall be gray baked enamel. Three 1/2 inch conduit knockouts shall be provided in the cabinet. Relay contacts shall be SPDT rated 8 amps inductive load 120 volt A.C. 60 cycle, 5/16 inch diameter fine silver. Relay coil shall be wound on a molded phenolic bobbin and centrifugally impregnated with high quality varnish. Breakdown shall be a minimum 1500 volt RMS between all elements. Terminals shall be No. 8 heavy duty screw type. The air handling unit shutdown relay shall be Underwriters Laboratories Inc. listed. AUDIBLE AND VISUAL INDICATING DEVICE: The Multi -Alert Sounder -Strobe shall be Wheelock AES -DLI -Wm -24 -VF - R, or approved equal. They shall be U.L. listed for fire protective service and shall provide 24 VDC inputs, and shall meet ADA requirements.. The integral strobe shall be UL listed with candela rating of 117 and shall meet ADA requirements. VISUAL STROBES• All visual strobes shall be equal to Wheelock WMT-24FR and shall meet ADA requirements. INSTALLATION• The installation of the system shall be made by the Contractor under the supervision of a representative of the manufacturer who shall make the final connection to the system, perform the functional tests of the system and place it in operation. Installation shall be in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. Consult manufacturer for all wiring diagrams, schematics, sizes, outlets, etc. before installing conduits and pulling wires. 16I-6 93008 Fire alarm devices shall be mounted upon and all splices made in Listed Boxes. Wiring splices are to be avoided to the extent possible and Transposing or changing colors will not bepermitted". Fire Alarm Control Panel shall be connected to a separate dedicated branch circuit, maximum 20 amperes as shown. Circuit shall be labeled as "FIRE ALARM'". This circuit shall originate from an emergency panel. Cable for initiating devices (manual stations, heat detectors, smoke detectors, etc.) shall be looped by zone. Cable shall be installed from the Control Panel to the first device, then to each succeeding device within each zone loop. All manual fire alarm stations shall be connected ahead of all other devices. An end -of - line resistor device shall be installed at or after the last device on the circuit. Cable for indicating devices (audible or visual) shall be looped as stated above from the Control Panel. An end -of -line resistor device shall be installed at or after the last device on the circuit. Use only identified conduit entries at Fire Alarm Panel or request approval for other penetrations in cabinets (certain areas require clear space for interior components) . Cabinet shall be grounded to a cold water pipe. IDENTIFICATION: All fire alarm circuits shall be identified at all terminal and junction boxes. In addition all pull and junction boxes with no fire alarm devices secured to it shall have its cover painted read and "Fire Alarm" stenciled on it in 1" high black letters. FINAL INSPECTION: After the system has been placed in functioning properly, call for a manufacturer's representative shall demonstrate the operation of the system Owner. INSTRUCTION• service and all items are final inspection. The be present and shall to the satisfaction of the The representative of the manufacturer shall allot eight (8) hours to instruct the Owner's personnel as to the complete operation of the system. END OF SEC'T'ION 16I-7 93008 SPECIAL CONDITIONS NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE TO: The City of Lubbock, having considered the proposals submitted and opened on the day of 199 for work to be done and materials to be furnished in and for: as set forth in detail in the Specifications, Plans, and Contract Documents for such work for the City of Lubbock; it appearing that your proposal is fair, equitable and to the best interest of said City, please take notice that said proposal was accepted by the City Council of the City of Lubbock on the day of 199 at the bid price contained therein, subject to the execution of and furnishing of all contract documents, bonds, certificates of insurance, and all other documents specified and required to be executed and furnished under the contract documents. It will be necessary for you to execute and furnish to the City of Lubbock all such documents within ten (10) days from your receipt of this Notice. The five percent (5"/0) bid security, submitted with your proposal, will be returned upon the execution of such contract documents and bonds within the above specified ten (10) day period. In the event you should fail to execute and furnish such contract documents and bonds within the time limit specified, said bid security will be retained by the City of Lubbock. CITY OF LUBBOCK Owner's Representative